Sun StorageTek SL24 Tape Autoloader and SL48 Tape Library User

Sun StorageTek SL24 Tape Autoloader and SL48 Tape Library User
Sun StorageTek™ SL24 Tape Autoloader
and SL48 Tape Library
User and service guide
AH945-96055
Sun Doc Part number: 875‐4225‐11
Third edition: September 2008
Legal and notice information
© Copyright 2008 Sun Microsystems, Inc. 4150 Network Circle, Santa Clara, California 95054 U.S.A 650–960–1300
This document was created by Hewlett‐Packard Company (“HP”) for Sun Microsystems, Inc. (“Sun”).
Sun makes no warranties of any kind with regard to this material, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. Sun shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or
consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material.
This document contains proprietary information, which is protected by copyright. No part of this document may be
photocopied, reproduced, or translated to another language without the prior written consent of Sun.
Sun shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. The information is provided ʺas isʺ without
warranty of any kind and is subject to change without notice. The warranties for Sun products are set forth in the express
limited warranty statements for such products. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty.
Sun StorageTek™ SL24 Tape Autoloader and Sun StorageTek™ SL48 Tape Library are trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc.
Other trademarks may be mentioned herein which belong to other companies.
Contents
About this guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intended audience . . . . . . . .
Document conventions and symbols
Rack stability . . . . . . . . . .
Sun technical support . . . . . .
Sun websites . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1 Features and overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interface specifications and requirements for parallel SCSI drives
Parallel SCSI host bus adapters (HBAs) . . . . . . . . .
Multiple LUN support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Default SCSI IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interface specifications and requirements for Fibre Channel drives
Interface specifications and requirements for SAS drives . . . .
LTO‐4 tape drives and encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Logical libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Partitioning the SL24 Tape Autoloader . . . . . . . . . .
Partitioning the SL48 Tape Library . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Back panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tape drive LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power supply back panel (SL48) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2 Installing the Autoloader or Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparing the host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Planning the parallel SCSI configuration . . . . . . . . . . .
About parallel SCSI busses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optimizing throughput . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCSI addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Planning the SAS configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About SAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SAS cables and connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
World Wide identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Planning the Fibre Channel configuration . . . . . . . . . .
Direct connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SAN connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Choosing a location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unpacking the shipping container . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Identifying product components . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the shipping lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting the device in a rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the Tabletop Conversion Kit . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing additional tape drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a redundant power supply . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the SCSI address (parallel SCSI drives only) . . . . .
Connecting the parallel SCSI cable (parallel SCSI devices only) .
Connecting the Fibre Channel cables (Fibre Channel devices only)
Connecting the SAS cable (SAS devices only) . . . . . . . . .
Powering on the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verifying the connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Labeling and loading the tape cartridges . . . . . . . . . . .
Verifying the installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring additional features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
User and service guide
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
15
15
15
16
16
16
17
19
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
25
26
27
29
29
30
30
30
30
31
32
32
32
33
33
33
33
34
35
36
36
40
41
41
42
43
43
44
45
45
46
46
47
47
3
3 Tape cartridges and magazines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tape cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using and maintaining tape cartridges
Labeling tape cartridges . . . . . .
Write‐protecting tape cartridges . . .
Backward read compatibility . . . .
Magazines . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4 Operating the Autoloader or Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote management interface (RMI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Status pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Getting help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Identity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing static device information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing static drive information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing network information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing dynamic device information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing dynamic drive information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing the tape cartridge inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the system configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the drive configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the network configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration: Network Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the administrator password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the date and time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting error log mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting event notification parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving and restoring the Autoloader or Library configuration and restoring factory defaults
Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Moving media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Updating the current media inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Releasing and replacing the magazines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performing general diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service the Autoloader or Library ‐ Service restricted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Determining and updating firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rebooting the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning tape drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sun Service link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SL24 Operator control panel (OCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LED indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Autoloader home screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operator control panel buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Understanding the menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering the administrator password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unlocking the mailslot (Unlock Mailslot) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Status/Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inventory (Status/Information > Inventory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Autoloader information (Status/Information > Autoloader Information) . . . . . . . . .
Drive information (Status/Information > Drive Information) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Component status (Status/Information > Component Status) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network information (Status/Information > Network Information) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring logical libraries (Status/Information > Set Logical Libraries) . . . . . . . . .
Changing the administrator password (Configuration > Change Admin Password) . . . .
4
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
49
49
49
50
51
51
52
55
55
55
56
57
58
58
58
60
62
63
63
64
67
68
68
72
73
75
76
77
77
78
78
80
80
81
81
82
82
83
83
83
84
85
85
87
88
88
89
89
91
92
92
93
94
94
95
95
95
96
96
Setting the number of reserved slots (Configuration > Set Reserved Slot Count) . . . . . . .
Configuring the mailslot (Configuration > Configure Mailslot) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bar code reporting format (Configuration > Barcode Format Reporting) . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the SCSI address — parallel SCSI devices (Configuration > Change Drive) . . . . .
Changing the drive configuration — Fibre Channel devices (Configuration > Change Drive) .
Setting the master drive (Configuration > Set Master Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting behaviors (Configuration > Autoloader Behavior) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the date and time (Configuration > Autoloader Date/Time) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring network settings (Configuration > Configure Network Settings) . . . . . . .
Configuring automatic cleaning (Configuration > Configure Auto Cleaning) . . . . . . .
Restoring factory defaults (Configuration > Restore Defaults) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving and restoring the Autoloader configuration (Configuration > Save/Restore
Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unlocking, removing, and replacing magazines (Operations > Unlock Left or Right Magazine)
Cleaning a tape drive (Operations > Clean Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Moving tapes in the Autoloader (Operations > Move Tape) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Updating tape cartridge inventory (Operations > Perform Inventory) . . . . . . . . . . .
Rebooting the Autoloader (Operations > Reboot Autoloader) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enabling password locks (Operations > Enable Autoldr Password Locks) . . . . . . . . .
Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Powering a drive on or off (Support > Power On/Off Drives) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Running the demonstration (Support > Run Demo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Running the slot to slot test (Support > Run Slot To Slot Test) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Running the wellness test (Support > Run Wellness Test) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Upgrading firmware (Support > Autoloader FW Upgrade, Support > Drive FW Upgrade) .
Viewing logs (Support > Autoloader Error Log) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Forcing the drive to eject a tape (Support > Force Drive To Eject Tape) . . . . . . . . . .
SL48 operator control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operations available using the OCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operator control panel navigation buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the OCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Status message bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menu bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Administrator password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illustrated menu option and navigation examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening mailslots (Operations > Open Mailslots) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Moving Media (Operations > Move Media) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Info menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing status information (Info > Status) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing identity information (Info > Identity Library) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing identity information (Info > Identity Drives) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing inventory information (Info > Inventory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing network information (Info > Network) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the number of logical libraries (Configuration > Logical Libraries) . . . . . . .
Changing the Library configuration (Configuration > Library) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the drive configuration (Configuration > Drives) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the network configuration (Configuration > Network) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Barcode reporting format (Configuration > Barcode Reporting) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting and changing the administrator password (Configuration > Set Admin Password) .
Restore defaults (Configuration > Restore Defaults) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Library date and time (Configuration > Set Date and Time) . . . . . . . . . .
Saving and restoring the Library configuration (Configuration > Save/Restore) . . . . . .
Operations menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening the mailslot (Operations > Open Mailslot) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unlocking, removing and replacing magazines (Operations > Unlock Left/Right Magazines .
Moving Media (Operations > Move Media) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performing Inventory (Operations > Inventory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User and service guide
97
97
97
98
98
99
99
100
101
102
102
103
103
104
104
105
106
106
107
107
107
107
108
108
109
110
111
112
112
112
113
113
114
114
115
116
116
118
119
119
120
120
121
121
121
121
121
123
123
123
123
124
125
125
125
126
126
126
127
5
Enabling Password Locks (Operations > Enable Password Locks)
Support menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Powering drives on and off (Support > Power on/off Drives) . .
Cleaning the tape drive (Support > Clean Drive) . . . . . . . .
Running tests (Support > Run Tests) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing logs (Support > View Logs) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Updating Library and drive firmware (Support > FW Upgrade) .
Force ejecting a drive (Support > Force Drive Eject) . . . . . .
Rebooting the Tape Library (Support > Reboot) . . . . . . . .
5 Troubleshooting
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Detection problems after installing a parallel SCSI device . . . .
Detection problems after installing a SAS device . . . . . . .
Fibre Channel connection problems . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performance problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Average file size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File system type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection from the host server to the disks . . . . . . .
Operating system configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Novell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Backup server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Backup type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File‐by‐file with a full‐featured backup application . .
File‐by‐file with a native application . . . . . . . . .
Disk image, flash, or sequential . . . . . . . . . . .
Database backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection from the host server to the Autoloader or Library
Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service and repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Releasing the magazines manually . . . . . . . . . . .
The wellness test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Finding error code information on the SL24 OCP . . . . .
Finding error code information on the SL48 OCP . . . . .
Finding error code information on the RMI . . . . . . . .
Main error code descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error sub‐code descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Robotic error sub‐codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Device error sub‐codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drive error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
6 Upgrading and servicing the Autoloader or Library . . . . . . . . .
Possible tools needed . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a new tape drive . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing and replacing a tape drive . . . . . . .
Removing and replacing a magazine . . . . . . . .
Using the SL24 operator control panel . . . . .
Using the SL48 operator control panel . . . . .
Using the remote management interface . . . .
Using the manual release . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a redundant power supply (SL48 only) . .
Replacing the power supply (SL48) . . . . . . . .
Replacing the library controller (SL48) . . . . . . .
Removing and replacing the base chassis . . . . . .
Recording configuration settings . . . . . . .
Removing the tape cartridge from the tape drive
6
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
127
127
127
127
128
128
128
129
129
131
131
133
134
135
141
142
142
143
145
146
146
147
147
147
148
148
148
148
150
150
150
151
153
154
154
155
156
162
162
164
165
165
169
169
170
171
174
174
174
175
176
176
178
180
182
182
183
Removing the cables, magazines, and tape drives . . . . . .
Removing the power supply and library controller (SL48 only)
Removing the base chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unpacking the new chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing the base chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
A Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Physical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Environmental specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B Regulatory compliance and safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Regulatory compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Regulatory compliance identification numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Regulatory compliance label location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Federal Communications Commission notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Class A equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Class B equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Declaration of conformity for products marked with the FCC logo, United States only
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Laser device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Laser safety warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
International notices and statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Canadian notice (avis Canadien) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Class A equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Class B equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
European Union notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BSMI notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Japanese notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Korean notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Taiwan battery recycling notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Japanese power cord notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Waste electrical and electronic equipment directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Czechoslovakian notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Danish notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dutch notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
English notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Estonian notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Finnish notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
French notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
German notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Greek notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hungarian notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Italian notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Latvian notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lihuanian notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Polish notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Portuguese notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Slovakian notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Slovenian notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spanish notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Swedish notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
C Electrostatic discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Preventing electrostatic damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grounding methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User and service guide
183
184
185
186
186
189
189
189
191
191
191
191
191
191
191
192
192
192
192
192
193
193
193
193
193
193
194
194
194
194
195
195
195
195
196
196
196
197
197
197
198
198
199
199
199
200
200
201
201
201
202
202
203
203
203
7
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
205
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
211
8
Figures
1 SL24 default SCSI IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 SL48 default SCSI IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 SL24 front panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20
20
24
4 SL48 front panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24
5 Operator control panel LEDs
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25
6 SL48 back panel overview with a full‐height parallel SCSI tape drive . . . . . . . . . .
25
7 SL24 back panel overview with a Fibre Channel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
26
8 SL24 back panel overview with SAS tape drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
26
9 Tape drive LED
26
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10 Power supply LEDs
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27
11 SL24 parallel SCSI tape drive default SCSI addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31
12 SL48 parallel SCSI tape drive default SCSI addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31
13 Example SAS fanout cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32
14 Shipping lock location
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
36
15 Shipping lock storage location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
36
16 Rack kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17 Replacing alignment pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37
38
18 Attaching the clip nut to the rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
38
19 Securing the rails to the rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
39
20 Clip nut location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
39
21 Securing the Tape Autoloader or Library to the rack
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
40
22 Installing the tabletop conversion cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
40
23 Installing a tape drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
41
24 Installing the new power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
42
25 Redundant power supply thumbscrews . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
42
26 Attaching the parallel SCSI cable to the tape drive
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
43
27 Attaching the Fibre Channel cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
44
28 Example SAS fanout cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
44
29 Attaching the power cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45
30 Write‐protecting the data cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51
31 SL24 slot numbering with the single mailslot enabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
52
32 SL48 slot numbering with mailslot disabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
53
33 SL48 lower‐left magazine slot numbering with mailslot enabled . . . . . . . . . . . .
53
34 RMI login page
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
56
35 System Status pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
57
36 Help button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
58
User and service guide
9
37 Identity: Library or Autoloader page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
58
38 Identity: Library or Autoloader page with two logical libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . .
59
39 Identity: Drive page (parallel SCSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
60
40 Identity: Drive page (Fibre Channel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
61
41 Identity: Drive page (SAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
61
42 Identity: Network page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
62
43 Status: Library or Autoloader page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
63
44 Status: Drive page (parallel SCSI)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
65
45 Status: Drive page (Fibre Channel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
65
46 Status: Drive page (SAS)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
66
47 Status: Inventory page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
67
48 Status: Inventory: Media details pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
68
49 Configuration: System page with one logical library
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
69
50 Configuration: System page for two logical libraries
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70
51 Configuration: Drive page (parallel SCSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72
52 Configuration: Drive page (Fibre Channel)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73
53 Configuration: Drive page (SAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73
54 Configuration: Network page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
74
55 Configuration: Network Management page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
76
56 Configuration: Password page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
77
57 Configuration: Date/Time page
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
77
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
78
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
78
60 Configuration: Restore defaults page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
79
61 Operations: Move Media page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
81
62 Operations: Inventory page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
81
63 Operations: Magazines page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
82
64 Support: General Diagnostic page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
82
65 Support: Service the Library page
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
83
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
83
67 Support: Reboot page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
84
68 Support: Library Logs page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
85
69 Support: Clean Drive page
85
58 Configuration: Log page
59 Configuration: Alerts page
66 Support: Firmware page
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70 Support: Sun Service Link page
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
86
71 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72 Operator control panel buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
88
89
73 Autoloader menu tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
74 Removing a tape from the mailslot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
91
92
75 OCP menu, showing initial system status information
76 Operator control panel menu
10
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
114
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
115
77 Mailslot‐capable magazine and slot, each marked with a white dot . . . . . . . . . .
117
78 Operations menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
117
79 Removing the existing tape from the mailslot
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
118
80 Operations menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
119
81 SL48 parallel SCSI tape drive default SCSI addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
124
82 Mailslot‐capable magazine and slot, each marked with a white dot . . . . . . . . . .
126
83 SL24 parallel SCSI tape drive default SCSI addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
131
84 SL48 parallel SCSI tape drive default SCSI addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
132
85 Removable Storage service
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
146
86 Access holes for the right and left magazines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
150
87 Releasing the magazine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
151
88 Initial OCP error message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
154
89 Error code in the OCP Error Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
154
90 Error message in the OCP Error Log
154
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
91 No additional information in the OCP error log
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
154
92 Date and time in the OCP error log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
154
93 Support: Library Logs page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
156
94 Installing a new tape drive
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
170
95 Tighten the blue thumbscrews . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
171
96 Drive LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
97 Captive screws on the tape drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
172
172
98 Removing a tape drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
172
99 Installing a tape drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
173
100 RMI login page
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
175
101 Operations: Magazines page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
175
102 Manual magazine release holes
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
176
103 Removing the left magazine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
176
104 Installing the new power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
177
105 Securing the power supply to the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
177
106 Power supply LEDs
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
178
107 Removing the old power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
179
108 Installing the new power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
179
109 Power supply LEDs
180
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
110 Removing the library controller
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
181
111 Installing the new library controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
181
112 SL48 system status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
182
113 Captive screws on the tape drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
183
114 Removing a tape drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
184
115 Removing the power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
184
116 Removing the library controller
185
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User and service guide
11
117 Removing the base chassis from the rack
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
186
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
187
119 Shipping lock storage location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
187
120 Securing a Tape Library to the rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
188
118 Shipping lock location
12
Tables
1 Document conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 Autoloader and Library capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15
17
3 LTO‐2 HH Autoloader and Library specifications
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17
4 LTO‐3 HH Autoloader and Library specifications
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18
5 LTO‐3 FH Autoloader and Library specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18
6 LTO‐4 HH Autoloader and Library specifications
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18
7 LTO‐4 FH Autoloader and Library specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18
8 Parallel SCSI interface types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19
9 SL24 Tape Autoloader partitioned into two logical libraries
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22
10 SL48 Tape Library partitioned into two logical libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23
11 SL48 Tape Library partitioned into three logical libraries
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23
12 SL48 Tape Library partitioned into four logical libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23
13 Location criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14 Product contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15 Backward read compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
34
35
51
16 Drive status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17 Display indication definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
89
93
18 OCP buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19 Navigation buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
113
113
20 Library status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
114
21 Power problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
135
22 Failure/attention indications displayed on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
136
23 Tape movement problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
137
24 Media problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
138
25 Parallel SCSI device not detected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
26 Attention LED is lit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27 Inventory problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
139
140
141
28 RMI network connection issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29 Cleaning problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
141
141
30 Performance impact of various file sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
142
31 Performance impact of various file systems
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
143
32 Performance impact of various disk connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
143
33 Backup server requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
147
34 Performance impact of various Autoloader or Library connections . . . . . . . . . .
149
35 Top‐row corner slot positions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
152
36 Main error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37 Robotic error sub‐codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
38 Device error sub‐codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
156
162
164
User and service guide
13
14
39 Drive error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
40 Warning event codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
165
165
41 SL24 Tape Autoloader physical specifications: all models . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
189
42 SL48 Tape Library physical specifications: all models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
189
43 Environmental specifications
189
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About this guide
This guide provides information about:
•
•
•
•
Installing a Sun StorageTek™ SL24 Tape Autoloader or SL48 Tape Library
Configuring and operating a Sun StorageTek™ SL24 Tape Autoloader or SL48 Tape Library
Troubleshooting a Sun StorageTek™ SL24 Tape Autoloader or SL48 Tape Library
Upgrading and servicing a Sun StorageTek™ SL24 Tape Autoloader or SL48 Tape Library
Intended audience
This guide is intended for system administrators and other users who need physical and functional
knowledge of a Sun StorageTek™ SL24 Tape Autoloader or SL48 Tape Library.
Document conventions and symbols
Table 1 Document conventions
Convention
Element
Blue text: Table 1
Cross‐reference links and e‐mail addresses
Blue, underlined text: http://www.sun.com
Website addresses
Bold text
• Keys that are pressed
• Text entered into a GUI element, such as a box
• GUI elements that are clicked or selected, such as
menu and list items, buttons, tabs, and check boxes
Italic text
Text emphasis
Monospace text
•
•
•
•
Monospace, italic text
• Code variables
• Command variables
Monospace, bold text
Emphasized monospace text
File and directory names
System output
Code
Commands, their arguments, and argument values
WARNING!
Indicates that failure to follow directions could result in bodily harm or death.
CAUTION:
Indicates that failure to follow directions could result in damage to equipment or data.
IMPORTANT:
Provides clarifying information or specific instructions.
User and service guide
15
NOTE:
Provides additional information.
TIP:
Provides helpful hints and shortcuts.
Rack stability
Racks must be stable to insure the safety of personnel and avoid equipment damage.
WARNING!
To reduce the risk of personal injury or damage to equipment:
• Extend leveling jacks to the floor.
• Ensure that the full weight of the rack rests on the leveling jacks.
• Install stabilizing feet on the rack.
• In multiple‐rack installations, fasten racks together securely.
• Extend only one rack component at a time. Racks can become unstable if more than one
component is extended.
Sun technical support
Telephone numbers for worldwide technical support are listed on the Sun support website:
http://www.sun.com/service/contacting/solution.html.
Collect the following information before calling:
•
•
•
•
•
•
SunSpectrum contract number
Product serial numbers
Product model names and numbers
Error messages
Operating system type and revision level
Detailed questions
For continuous quality improvement, calls may be recorded or monitored.
Sun websites
For additional information, see the following Sun websites:
•
•
•
•
16
http://www.sun.com — Sun corporate website
http://www.sun.com/storagetek/tape_storage — Sun storage products
http://www.sun.com/service/contacting/solution.html — Sun Support website
http://docs.sun.com/app/docs — documentation about Sun products
About this guide
1 Features and overview
The Sun StorageTek™ SL24 Tape Autoloader and SL48 Tape Library provide compact, high‐capacity,
low‐cost solutions for simple, unattended data backup. This unique design houses up to 12 tape
cartridges for each U of height, with easy access to tape cartridges via removable magazines and one
or more mailslots (see Table 2). Each magazine can hold up to 12 tape cartridges.
The Autoloader and Library are compatible with most operating systems. However, the Autoloader
and Library require either direct support from the operating system or a compatible backup
application to take full advantage of their many features.
The Autoloader and Library are customer expandable with exchangeable tape drives. The Autoloader
and Library support the LTO‐2, LTO‐3 and LTO‐4 HH parallel SCSI tape drives, the LTO‐3 and LTO‐4
HH SAS tape drives, and the LTO‐3 and LTO‐4 full‐height (FH) parallel SCSI and Fibre Channel
tape drives.
Table 2 Autoloader and Library capacity
SL24
SL48
Form factor
2U
4U
Maximum cartridge slots
24
48
Mailslots
0, 1
0, 3
Maximum full‐height tape drives
1
2
Maximum half‐height tape drives
2
4
Native: 4.8 TB (24 x 200 GB)
Compressed (2:1): 9.6 TB
Native: 9.6 TB (48 x 200
GB)
Compressed (2:1): 19.1 TB
Maximum storage capacity: LTO‐2 media
Maximum storage capacity: LTO‐3 media
Maximum storage capacity: LTO‐4 media
nl
Native: 9.6 TB (24 x 400 GB)
Compressed (2:1): 19.1 TB
nl
Native: 19.1 TB (24 x 800 GB)
Compressed (2:1): 38.2 TB
nl
nl
Native: 19.1 TB (48 x 400
GB)
Compressed (2:1): 38.2 TB
nl
Native: 38.2 TB (48 x 800
GB)
Compressed (2:1): 76.4 TB
nl
Maximum data transfer rates are shown in Table 3, Table 4, Table 5, Table 6, and Table 7.
Table 3 LTO‐2 HH Autoloader and Library specifications
Characteristic
Specification
Tape drive
LTO‐2, half‐height, parallel SCSI
Maximum data transfer rate — one drive
Maximum data transfer rate — two drives
Maximum data transfer rate — three drives
Maximum data transfer rate — four drives
Native: 24 MB/s (86 GB/hr.)
Compressed 2:1): 48 MB/s (172 GB/hr.)
nl
Native: 48 MB/s (172 GB/hr.)
Compressed (2:1): 96 MB/s (344 GB/hr.)
nl
Native: 72 MB/s (256 GB/hr.)
Compressed (2:1): 144 MB/s (516 GB/hr.)
nl
Native: 96 MB/s (344 GB/hr.)
Compressed (2:1): 192 MB/s (688 GB/hr.))
nl
User and service guide
17
Table 4 LTO‐3 HH Autoloader and Library specifications
Characteristic
Specification
Tape drive
LTO‐3, half‐height, parallel SCSI and SAS
Maximum data transfer rate — one drive
Maximum data transfer rate — two drives
Maximum data transfer rate — three drives
Maximum data transfer rate — four drives
Native: 60 MB/s (215 GB/hr.)
Compressed (2:1): 120 MB/s (430 GB/hr.)
nl
Native: 120 MB/s (430 GB/hr.)
Compressed (2:1): 240 MB/s (860 GB/hr.)
nl
Native: 180 MB/s (645 GB/hr.)
Compressed (2:1): 360 MB/s (1290 GB/hr.)
nl
Native: 240 MB/s (860 GB/hr.)
Compressed (2:1): 480 MB/s (1720 GB/hr.)
nl
Table 5 LTO‐3 FH Autoloader and Library specifications
Characteristic
Specification
Tape drive
LTO‐3, full‐height, parallel SCSI and FC
Maximum data transfer rate — one drive
Maximum data transfer rate — two drives
Native: 80 MB/s (288 GB/hr.)
Compressed (2:1): 160 MB/s (576 GB/hr.)
nl
Native: 160 MB/s (576 GB/hr.)
Compressed (2:1): 320 MB/s (1152 GB/hr.)
nl
Table 6 LTO‐4 HH Autoloader and Library specifications
Characteristic
Specification
Tape drive
LTO‐4, half‐height, parallel SCSI and SAS
Maximum data transfer rate — one drive
Maximum data transfer rate — two drives
Maximum data transfer rate — three drives
Maximum data transfer rate — four drives
Native: 80 MB/s (288 GB/hr.)
Compressed (2:1): 160 MB/s (576 GB/hr.)
nl
Native: 160 MB/s (576 GB/hr.)
Compressed (2:1): 320 MB/s (1152 GB/hr.)
nl
Native: 240 MB/s (864 GB/hr.)
Compressed (2:1): 480 MB/s (1728 GB/hr.)
nl
Native: 320 MB/s (1152 GB/hr.)
Compressed (2:1): 640 MB/s (2304 GB/hr.)
nl
Table 7 LTO‐4 FH Autoloader and Library specifications
Characteristic
Specification
Tape drive
LTO‐4, full‐height, parallel SCSI and FC
Maximum data transfer rate — one drive
Maximum data transfer rate — two drives
18
Features and overview
Native: 120 MB/s (432 GB/hr.)
Compressed (2:1): 240 MB/s (864 GB/hr.)
nl
Native: 240 MB/s (864 GB/hr.)
Compressed (2:1): 480 MB/s (1,728 GB/hr.)
nl
Interface specifications and requirements for parallel SCSI
drives
The parallel SCSI Autoloader and Library use the SCSI interface types described in Table 8. The
Autoloader and Library use a separate SCSI ID for each tape drive, with dual LUNs on the master
drive’s SCSI ID to control the tape drive (LUN 0) and Library robotic (LUN 1). Sun recommends that
each LTO tape drive be put on its own bus when possible.
Table 8 Parallel SCSI interface types
LTO generation
SCSI Interface
LTO‐2
Ultra 160 SCSI LVD/SE
LTO‐3, LTO‐4
Ultra 320 SCSI LVD
The parallel SCSI Autoloader and Library incorporate a wide SCSI‐2 or SCSI‐3 low‐voltage differential
(LVD) SCSI bus. Make sure your SCSI host adapter or controller supports these standards.
IMPORTANT:
The Autoloader and Library are NOT compatible with a high‐voltage differential (HVD) SCSI bus.
Do not put the Autoloader or Library on a narrow (50–pin) parallel SCSI bus because doing so
will severely degrade performance.
Parallel SCSI host bus adapters (HBAs)
For optimum performance, place each tape drive on its own parallel SCSI bus with a host bus adapter
that can transfer data as fast as the Autoloader or Library can read and write. The HBA must also be
supported by your operating system.
• For LTO‐3 or LTO‐4 tape drives, use an Ultra 320 HBA.
• For LTO‐2 tape drives, use an Ultra 320 or Ultra 160 HBA.
IMPORTANT:
Do not connect an LTO tape drive to an SE SCSI bus, as it severely degrades Autoloader and
Library performance. A single‐ended SCSI host bus adapter severely degrades Autoloader and
Library performance and limits cable length. Also, if any SE devices are on the SCSI bus, all of the
devices on the bus slow down to SE speed, severely degrading performance.
Multiple LUN support
The Autoloader and Library use a single SCSI ID and two logical unit numbers (LUN). LUN 0 controls
the tape drive and LUN 1 controls the robotic. The Autoloader and Library require an HBA that
supports multiple LUNs. If multiple LUN support is not enabled, the host computer cannot scan
beyond LUN 0 to discover the Autoloader or Library. It just sees the tape drive.
RAID controllers, and most on‐board HBAs do not support multiple LUNs.
IMPORTANT:
The Autoloader or Library requires an HBA that supports multiple LUNs, which is also called
“LUN scanning.”
User and service guide
19
Default SCSI IDs
The default SCSI ID for parallel SCSI tape drives is managed by the Autoloader or Library. The
default SCSI ID for all full‐height tape drives is 4.
The default SCSI ID for half‐height tape drives depends on the model.
• SL24: The default SCSI ID of the bottom drive bay is 4 and the default SCSI ID of the top
drive bay is 5 as shown in Figure 1.
2
1
11434
Figure 1 SL24 default SCSI IDs
1. Default SCSI ID 4
2. Default SCSI ID 5
• SL48: The default SCSI ID for the bottom drive of each pair is 4 and for the top drive is 5 as
shown in Figure 2.
2
1
11435
Figure 2 SL48 default SCSI IDs
1. Default SCSI ID 4
2. Default SCSI ID 5
Interface specifications and requirements for Fibre Channel
drives
The Fibre Channel tape drive can be connected directly to the server with a host bus adapter (HBA) or
through a storage area network (SAN).
If you plan to connect the Autoloader or Library directly to the server, you will need a 2 Gb or 4 Gb
Fibre Channel HBA. A 4 Gb HBA is suitable for all supported drive types and recommended for
LTO‐4 tape drives due to performance requirements. A 1 or 2 Gb HBA might result in performance
degradation when backing up highly compressible data.
In a SAN installation, all switches between the host and the Autoloader or Library must be of the
appropriate type. A 1 or 2 Gb switch in the path may result in performance degradation. Configure
zoning so only the backup servers may access the Autoloader or Library.
20
Features and overview
Interface specifications and requirements for SAS drives
The server must have a SAS host bus adapter with an external connector.
The device uses multiple LUNs to communicate with the Autoloader or Library. Most SAS RAID
controllers do not support multiple LUNs.
Most SAS HBA ports provide four SAS channels. Each tape drive uses one channel.
The SAS fanout cable supplied with the SL24 Tape Autoloader and SL48 Tape Library can connect
up to four SAS tape drives to a single SAS HBA port. Any of the four drive cable ends can be used
for any of the tape drives. If you use a different cable, verify that the mini‐SAS connectors on the
tape drive end are keyed for location 4.
See “About SAS” on page 32 for more information about SAS.
LTO‐4 tape drives and encryption
The LTO‐4 tape drives include hardware capable of encrypting data while writing data, and
decrypting data when reading. Hardware encryption can be used with or without compression while
maintaining the full speed and capacity of the LTO‐4 tape drive and media.
Encryption is the process of changing data into a form that cannot be read until it is deciphered with
the key used to encrypt the data, protecting the data from unauthorized access and use. LTO‐4 tape
drives use the 256‐bit version of the industry‐standard AES encrypting algorithm to protect your data.
To make use of this feature you need:
• A backup application that supports hardware encryption. Refer to the Errata Sheet for Backup
Applications that are supported.
• LTO‐4 media; no encryption will be performed when writing earlier generations of tape.
NOTE:
LTO‐4 tape drives can read Ultrium 800 GB and Ultrium 400 GB media and write to Ultrium 800
GB media, but hardware encryption is not supported on these formats.
Your company policy will determine when you need to use encryption. For example, it may be
mandatory for company confidential and financial data, but not for personal data. Company policy
will also define how encryption keys should be generated and managed. Backup applications that
support encryption will generate a key for you or allow you to enter a key manually.
NOTE:
Encryption with keys that are generated directly from passwords or passphrases may be less
secure than encryption using truly random keys. Your application should explain the options
and methods that are available. Please refer to your application’s user documentation for more
information.
Hardware encryption is turned off by default and is switched on by settings in your backup
application, where you also generate and supply the encryption key. Your backup application must
support hardware encryption for this feature to work.
Encryption is primarily designed to protect the media once it is offline and to prevent it being accessed
from another machine. You will be able to read and append the encrypted media without being
prompted for a key as long as it is being accessed by the machine and application that first encrypted it.
There are two main instances when you will need to know the key:
• If you try to import the media to another machine or another instance of the backup application
• If you are recovering your system after a disaster
User and service guide
21
If you are unable to supply the key when requested to do so, neither you nor Sun Support will be able
to access the encrypted data.
This guarantees the security of your data, but also means that you must be careful in the management
of the encryption key used to generate the tape.
CAUTION:
You should keep a record or backup of your encryption keys and store them in a secure place
separate from the computer running the backup software.
For detailed instructions about enabling encryption please refer to the documentation supplied with
your backup application. This will also highlight any default states, for example when copying tapes,
that may need changing if using encrypted tapes.
Logical libraries
You can configure a Tape Autoloader or Tape Library with multiple tape drives into logical
libraries. Each logical library must contain at least one tape drive. Each logical library is configured
independently, allowing use by different backup applications and with different backup policies. For
example, one logical library could perform a backup operation for one department while the second
logical library restores data for another department. Data cartridges in one logical library cannot
be shared with other logical libraries.
All logical libraries have access to the mailslot, if the mailslot is enabled. The Tape Autoloader or
Tape Library prohibits a cartridge that was placed in the mailslot by one logical library from being
moved into another logical library. The Autoloader or Library allows a cartridge that was placed
in the mailslot by the operator to be moved into any logical library. If sharing the mailslot among
logical libraries is an issue in your environment or is not supported by your backup application,
disable the mailslot.
Each logical library has a unique serial number and World Wide Identifier (WWID), which can be
found in the RMI Identity: Library screen. For more information on WWIDs, see “World Wide
identifiers” on page 32.
Partitioning the SL24 Tape Autoloader
An SL24 Tape Autoloader with two tape drives can be configured into two logical libraries. Each
logical library is assigned one tape drive and one magazine.
Table 9 SL24 Tape Autoloader partitioned into two logical libraries
Magazines
Tape drives
2
2
1
1
11870b
1. Logical library 1 tape drive and magazine
2. Logical library 2 tape drive and magazine
22
Features and overview
11870a
Partitioning the SL48 Tape Library
The SL48 Tape Library can be configured into two to four logical libraries, depending on the number
of tape drives installed. For the tape drives and magazines assigned to each logical library see Table
10 on page 23, Table 11 on page 23, and Table 12 on page 23.
If the Library only has two tape drives installed in the bottom two drive bays, move one tape
drive to the top half of the Library. Power off the tape drive from the RMI Configuration: Drive
screen before moving the tape drive. For instructions on removing and replacing a tape drive, see
“Removing and replacing a tape drive” on page 171.
Table 10 SL48 Tape Library partitioned into two logical libraries
Magazines
Tape drives
2
2
1
1
11880c
1
2
11880a
11880
1. Logical library 1 tape drives and magazines. The top tape drive is optional.
2. Logical library 2 tape drives and magazines. The top tape drive is optional.
Table 11 SL48 Tape Library partitioned into three logical libraries
Magazines
Tape drives
3
2
3
1
1
2
11882
11882a
1. Logical library 1 tape drive and magazine
2. Logical library 2 tape drive and magazine
3. Logical library 3 tape drives and magazines. The top tape drive is optional.
Table 12 SL48 Tape Library partitioned into four logical libraries
Magazines
Tape drives
3
1
4
2
4
1
3
11876
2
11877
1. Logical library 1 tape drive and magazine
2. Logical library 2 tape drive and magazine
3. Logical library 3 tape drive and magazine
4. Logical library 4 tape drive and magazine
Front panel overview
The front panel of the Autoloader or Library provides access to the power button, operator control
panel, left and right magazines, LEDs, and the mailslot as shown in Figure 3 and Figure 4. See
User and service guide
23
“Operator control panel (OCP)” on page 87 for SL24 OCP functions. See “SL48 operator control
panel” on page 112 for SL48 OCP functions.
7
1
2
3
6
5
4
6
7
11341
Figure 3 SL24 front panel overview
1. Power button
2. Magazine, mailslot location
3. Front panel LEDs
4. Front panel LCD screen
5. Control buttons
6. Air vents
7. Magazines
1
7
2
6
4
3
5
6
7
7
11346
Figure 4 SL48 front panel overview
1. Power button
2. Magazine, mailslot location
3. Front panel LEDs
4. Front panel LCD screen
5. Control buttons
6. Air vents
7. Magazines
The operator control panel includes four LEDs that indicate system status information as shown
in Figure 5.
24
Features and overview
1
2
3
4
11256
Figure 5 Operator control panel LEDs
1.
Green
Ready. Illuminated when power is on. Blinking when there is tape drive or robotics
activity.
2.
Amber
Clean. Illuminated when the tape drive has determined that a cleaning cartridge
should be used. Cleaning is only necessary when the device directs you to do so.
Additional cleaning is not necessary.
3.
Amber
Attention. Illuminated if the device has detected a condition that requires attention by
the operator.
4.
Amber
Error. Illuminated if an unrecoverable error occurs. A corresponding error message
displays on the LCD screen (see “Troubleshooting” on page 131 for more information).
Back panel overview
The back panel provides access to the drive interface connectors, the tape drives, the power connector,
the Ethernet, serial and USB ports, and the magazine release holes. The Autoloader and Library
support parallel SCSI, SAS, and Fibre Channel tape drives. For example, Figure 6 shows an SL48 with
a full‐height parallel SCSI tape drive, Figure 7 shows an SL24 with a Fibre Channel tape drive, and
Figure 8 shows an SL24 with a SAS tape drive.
2
3
8
4
1
2 10 9
8
5
6
7
11373
Figure 6 SL48 back panel overview with a full‐height parallel SCSI tape drive
1. 68–pin parallel SCSI connector
2. Fan
3. Power connector
4. Tape drive
5. Ethernet port
6. Serial port (Factory use only)
7. USB port
8. Magazine release hole
9. Pull‐out tab containing the serial number and
other product information
10. Tape drive LED
User and service guide
25
2
3
8
2
1
4 10 9
8
5
7
6
11362
Figure 7 SL24 back panel overview with a Fibre Channel drive
1. Fibre Channel ports
2. Fan
3. Power connector
4. Tape drive
5. Ethernet port
6. Serial port (Factory use only)
7. USB port
8. Magazine release hole
9. Pull‐out tab containing the serial number and
other product information
10. Tape drive LED
2
3
8
1
4
2
10 9
8
5
6
7
11672
Figure 8 SL24 back panel overview with SAS tape drive
1. SAS port
2. Fan vent
3. Power connector
4. Tape drive
5. Ethernet port
6. Serial port (Factory use only)
7. USB port
8. Magazine release hole
9. Pull‐out tab containing the serial number and
other product information
10. Tape drive LED
The device requires a 110/220 volt AC power connection.
Tape drive LED
Each tape drive has a green LED, which indicates that the tape drive is powered on (see Figure 9).
To HBA
1
11268
Figure 9 Tape drive LED
1. Tape drive LED
26
Features and overview
Power supply back panel (SL48)
1
2
3
11220
Figure 10 Power supply LEDs
1. Blue
AC power is connected.
2. Yellow
Fan failure. The fan is running too slow or is defective.
3. Green
The power supply is producing good power for the Library.
User and service guide
27
28
Features and overview
2 Installing the Autoloader or Library
This chapter contains the information you need to install and configure your Autoloader or Library.
The installation steps are:
• Preparing the host
• Planning the SCSI configuration, Planning the SAS configuration, or Planning the Fibre Channel
configuration
• Choosing a location
• Unpacking the shipping container
• Identifying product components
• Removing the shipping lock
• Mounting the device in a rack
• Installing the Tabletop Conversion Kit
• Installing tape drives
• Installing a redundant power supply
• Changing the SCSI address
• Connecting the SCSI cable (parallel SCSI devices only)
• Connecting the Fibre Channel cables (Fibre Channel devices only)
• Connecting the SAS cable (SAS devices only)
• Powering on the device
• Configuring the device
• Verifying the connection
• Labeling and loading the tape cartridges
• Verifying the installation
• Configuring additional features
Preparing the host
IMPORTANT:
Use proper procedures to prevent electrostatic discharge (ESD) (see
“Appendix: Electrostatic discharge” on page 203). Use wrist‐grounding straps and anti‐static
mats when handling internal components.
Follow these general steps:
• If the host server is connected to a network, check with the system administrator before
powering off the computer.
• For parallel SCSI Autoloaders or Libraries, install a parallel SCSI host bus adapter (HBA)
that supports multiple LUNs. Refer to the manuals for the host computer and the HBA for
installation information. See “Parallel SCSI host bus adapters (HBAs)” on page 19 for HBA
requirements.
• For SAS Autoloaders or Libraries, install a SAS host bus adapter (HBA) with an external SAS
connector that supports multiple LUNs. Refer to the manuals for the host computer and
the HBA for installation information. See “Planning the SAS configuration” on page 31 for
configuration requirements.
• For Fibre Channel Tape Autoloaders or Libraries, install an FC host bus adapter (HBA) or
verify that you have sufficient ports available on a compatible Fibre Channel switch. See
“Planning the Fibre Channel configuration” on page 33 for configuration requirements.
User and service guide
29
• Install application software and compatible drivers on the host computer. See the application
software’s manuals for installation and configuration information.
• For parallel SCSI devices, make sure multiple LUN support is enabled on the HBA and
operating system. See “Multiple LUN support” on page 19.
Planning the parallel SCSI configuration
If the host computer will have multiple parallel SCSI devices, you must decide how they will be
configured into one or more parallel SCSI busses.
About parallel SCSI busses
A parallel SCSI bus consists of the host bus adapter (HBA), the parallel SCSI devices, the parallel
SCSI cables, and the terminators. The HBA and devices are connected in a chain, with each device
connected to the next. The last device must have a SCSI terminator. Each device in the chain must
have a unique SCSI address (SCSI ID).
Complex devices, such as the Autoloader or Library, assign sub‐addresses, called logical unit numbers
(LUNs), to different parts of the device. The HBA and operating system must support multiple LUNs,
also called LUN scanning, for the application software to operate the Autoloader or Library. Most
third‐party RAID controllers and many on‐board SCSI controllers do not support multiple LUNs.
An HBA might have one or two channels, with each channel supporting one parallel SCSI bus. Check
to see how many channels the HBA has and what devices are already connected to the HBA. Some
devices, such as parallel SCSI disk drives, could be inside the server.
The devices on a parallel SCSI bus share bandwidth so be careful about which devices you put
together on a bus. Also, putting a single‐ended (SE) SCSI device on the bus will slow all of the devices
on the bus down to SE speed. Check each device’s interface specifications to see what kind of parallel
SCSI interface it has.
Optimizing throughput
If possible, put each tape drive on its own parallel SCSI bus. For optimum performance, each LTO‐3
or LTO‐4 tape drive must be on its own Ultra 320 SCSI bus. Two LTO‐2 tape drives can share an
Ultra 320 SCSI bus or each tape drive can be on its own Ultra 160 bus. This will give you the best
performance and easiest installation.
If a tape drive must share a parallel SCSI bus with one or more other devices, or the Autoloader or
Library has multiple tape drives that must share a bus, follow these guidelines to plan your parallel
SCSI busses for the highest performance:
• Do not put a tape drive on the same parallel SCSI bus as a disk drive because the system and
backup performance will be slow when data is written from the hard drive to tape or from tape to
the hard drive.
• Do not put a tape drive on the same parallel SCSI bus as a disk array because the disk and the tape
drive performance will be affected, most RAID controllers do not support multiple LUNs, and the
data on the disk array could become corrupted.
• Avoid putting an SE SCSI device on the same bus as a tape drive because the SE device will slow
the tape drive to SE speed and reduce the allowable cable length.
SCSI addresses
NOTE:
The HBA also has a SCSI address, which is typically 7.
30
Installing the Autoloader or Library
Verify that each device on the bus has a unique SCSI address. If these pre‐configured addresses
will not be unique on a bus, you will need to change the SCSI address of one or more of the tape
drives during the installation process.
• SL24: For full‐height tape drives the default SCSI address is 4. For half‐height drives, the
default SCSI address for the bottom drive is 4 and the default SCSI address for the top drive is
5 as shown in Figure 11.
2
1
11434
Figure 11 SL24 parallel SCSI tape drive default SCSI addresses
1. Tape drive with SCSI address 4
2. Tape drive with SCSI address 5
• SL48: For full‐height tape drives the default SCSI address is 4. For half‐height drives, the
default SCSI address for the bottom drive in each full‐height drive bay is 4 and the default
SCSI address for the top drive is 5 as shown in Figure 12.
2
1
11435
Figure 12 SL48 parallel SCSI tape drive default SCSI addresses
1. Tape drives with SCSI address 4
2. Tape drives with SCSI address 5
Planning the SAS configuration
The key steps in planning the SAS configuration are obtaining a suitable HBA and cable.
The server must have a SAS host bus adapter that supports multiple LUNs. Most SAS RAID
controllers do not support multiple LUNs, which are needed to communicate with the autoloader
or library controller.
CAUTION:
Do not connect the Autoloader or Library to a SAS RAID controller unless the controller
is qualified with the Autoloader or Library. The server might not be able to boot when the
Autoloader or Library is connected to a non‐supported SAS RAID controller.
User and service guide
31
The cable included with the product has a mini‐SAS connector on the HBA end. If you plan to use
a different cable, see “SAS cables and connectors” on page 32 for additional cable and connector
requirements.
About SAS
Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) is a computer bus technology mainly used to transfer data to and from
storage devices, including disk drives and tape drives. SAS is designed to transfer data at 3 gigabits
per second, which is comparable to the speed attained by Ultra320 SCSI.
SAS cables and connectors
SAS uses serial connections, with a direct connection between the host server and each of the storage
devices. This eliminates the need to configure SCSI busses and assign SCSI IDs, as is required for
parallel SCSI devices.
Most SAS HBA ports have four SAS channels. A tape drive uses one channel, so each HBA port can
support up to four tape drives. You can use a cable with one connector on each end, but only one
channel will be used. The SAS fanout cable supplied with the SL24 Tape Autoloader or SL48 Tape
Library can connect up to four SAS tape drives to a single SAS HBA. See Figure 13.
11622
Figure 13 Example SAS fanout cable
The Autoloader or Library has a mini‐SAS connector on each tape drive. The connector is keyed
in location 4, which is the standard location for end devices. If you use a cable other than the one
supplied with the product, verify that it is keyed in location 4.
CAUTION:
Mini‐SAS connectors are keyed. Do not force a SAS cable’s mini‐SAS connector into the tape drive
mini‐SAS connector because it might be keyed differently.
SAS signal rates require clean connections and a minimum number of connections between the
HBA and the Autoloader or Library. Do not use adapters or converters between the HBA and the
Autoloader or Library. Sun recommends a maximum SAS cable length of six meters.
World Wide identifiers
A SAS tape drive is identified by a unique identifier called a World Wide Name (WWN) or World
Wide Identifier (WWID). The Autoloader or Library assigns the World Wide identifier to the drive
bay. When a tape drive is replaced, the World Wide identifier is re‐assigned to the new tape drive.
The operating system tracks the World Wide identifier for the drive on each HBA channel. Each of
the drive connectors on the fanout cable is associated with an HBA channel. Once a drive has been
plugged in, it should remain on the same channel to retain the association between the HBA channel
and World Wide identifier.
32
Installing the Autoloader or Library
Planning the Fibre Channel configuration
You can connect the Autoloader or Library directly to the server with a host bus adapter (HBA) or
indirectly through a storage area network (SAN) with a switch.
You must provide a Fibre Channel cable for each tape drive in the Autoloader or Library. The tape
drive has an LC‐style connector.
Each Fibre Channel tape drive in the Autoloader or Library has two Fibre Channel ports. Only one
port may be used at a time, but both ports can be connected for path fail over if your application
supports path fail over. If you are using only one port, you can use either port.
Direct connection
If you plan to connect the Autoloader or Library directly to the server, you will need a 2 Gb or 4 Gb
FC HBA. A 4 Gb HBA is suitable for all supported tape drives. A 1 or 2 Gb HBA might result in
performance degradation when backing up highly compressible data.
A server that uses Fibre Channel disks needs at least two FC ports. Using the same port for disk and
tape access will cause performance degradation.
SAN connection
All switches between the host and the Autoloader or Library must be of the appropriate type. A 1 or 2
Gb switch in the path may result in performance degradation when backing up highly compressible
data.
Configure zoning on the Fibre switch so only the backup servers may access the Library. See the
switch manual for information on zoning.
Choosing a location
If you plan to mount the device in a rack, select an open rack location, ideally near the center of the
rack or higher, with access to the host server and a power outlet.
If you plan to set the Autoloader or Library on a table, select a level area large enough to support both
edges of the device with access to the host server and a power outlet.
IMPORTANT:
The SL24 Tape Autoloader and SL48 Tape Library must be mounted in the enclosed rack rails or
in the optional tabletop conversion cover. Placing the Autoloader or Library on a surface, such
as a table top or rack shelf, without the tabletop conversion cover could result in Autoloader or
Library errors.
User and service guide
33
Choose a location that meets the criteria shown in Table 13:
Table 13 Location criteria
Criteria
Definition
Tabletop
requirements
The SL24 Tape Autoloader or SL48 Tape Library can only be placed on a flat surface
if it is installed in the optional tabletop conversion cover. Select a location that is
flat, sturdy, and close to the host server. Ensure that all of the support feet on the
tabletop conversion cover will be supported. The Tabletop Conversion cover is not
a structural top so no weight may be placed on top of the cover.
Do not place the device on the floor or other carpeted surface.
Do not place the Autoloader or Library on its sides or upside down, or stack items
on top of it.
Rack requirements
Racks with 10–32 threaded holes in the rack column (Sun StorEdge Expansion
Cabinet), racks with M6 threaded holes in the rack column (Sun Rack 900 or 1000),
racks with 9.5 mm square holes in the rack column (Sun StorageTek Rack)
Rack space
requirements
SL24: 2U
SL48: 4U
Room temperature
10‐35º C (50‐95º F)
Power source
AC power voltage: 100‐127 VAC; 200‐240 VAC
Line frequency: 50‐60 Hz
Place the device near an AC outlet. The AC power cord is the product’s main AC
disconnect device and must be easily accessible at all times.
Weight without
media
SL24: 13.6 kg (29.9 lb) — 15.6 kg (34.3 lb)
SL48: 18.6 kg (40.9 lb) — 24.6 kg (54.1 lb)
Weight with media
SL24: 18.4 kg (40.5 lb) — 20.4 kg (44.9 lb)
SL48: 28.2 kg (62.0 lb) — 34.2 kg (75.2 lb)
Air quality
The device should be placed in an area with minimal sources of particulate
contamination. Avoid areas near frequently used doors and walkways, stacks of
supplies that collect dust, printers, and smoke‐filled rooms.
Excessive dust and debris can damage tapes and tape drives.
Humidity
20‐80 percent relative humidity non‐condensing
Clearance
Back: Minimum of 15.4 cm (6 inches)
Front: Minimum of 30.8 cm (12 inches)
Sides: Minimum of 5.08 cm (2 inches)
Unpacking the shipping container
Before you begin, clear a level work surface near where you will place the Autoloader or Library.
CAUTION:
If the temperature in the room where the device will be installed varies by 15º C (30º F) from the
room where it was stored, allow it to acclimate to the surrounding environment for at least 12
hours before unpacking it from the shipping container.
Unpacking the Autoloader or Library:
1.
Inspect the container for shipping damage. If you notice any damage, report it to the shipping
company immediately.
2.
Open the shipping container and remove the packaging foam and accessories that cover the
device.
34
Installing the Autoloader or Library
3.
Lift the device out of the carton, place it on the work surface.
CAUTION:
Do not place the Autoloader or Library on either end or its sides as this may damage it.
4.
Remove any other accessories from the shipping container. Save the packaging materials for
future use.
Identifying product components
Table 14 Product contents
SL24 Tape Autoloader
1
6
SL48 Tape Library
3
1
4
5
2
5
4
9
6
2
7
9
3
8
7
8
11358
11369
For the SL24 Tape Autoloader or SL48 Tape Library, confirm that you received the following
components:
1. Parallel SCSI cable (parallel SCSI Autoloaders and Libraries — ordered separately)
2. U320 parallel SCSI terminator (one per parallel SCSI drive)
3. Fibre Channel cable (Fibre Channel Autoloaders and Libraries — ordered separately)
4. SAS fanout cable (SAS Autoloaders and Libraries)
5. Ethernet cable (ordered separately)
6. Power cord
7. Two rack rails
8. Three packets of rack hardware: Use the packets for your rack. Each packet is labeled:
• Standard rack hardware packet: used for all rack types. Contains eight screws, eight flat washers,
and four clip nuts.
• 10–32 threaded‐hole rack packet: used for racks having vertical mounting rails with 10–32 threaded
holes in the rack column (Sun StorEdge Expansion Cabinet). Contains eight alignment pins.
• 9.5 mm square‐hole rack packet: used racks having vertical mountain rails with 9.5 mm square holes
in the rack column (Sun StorageTek Rack). Contains eight alignment pins and two clip nuts.
NOTE:
The Autoloader or Library can be installed into racks with M6 threaded holes in the rack
column, including the Sun Rack 900 and 1000, with only the Standard rack hardware packet.
9. Documentation kit
User and service guide
35
Removing the shipping lock
The shipping lock prevents the robotic transport mechanism from moving during shipment. You must
remove the shipping lock before powering on the device. The shipping lock is held in place with a
piece of tape and is located in the top center of the device. After the shipping lock is removed, it
should be stored on the back panel of the device for future use.
To remove and store the shipping lock:
1.
Locate the tape and lock at the top of the device (see Figure 14.)
11385
Figure 14 Shipping lock location
2.
Remove the tape, then remove the lock.
3.
Store the lock on the back panel of the device (see Figure 15).
11424
Figure 15 Shipping lock storage location
Mounting the device in a rack
If you plan to set the SL24 Tape Autoloader or SL48 Tape Library on a table or rack shelf, skip this step
and continue with “Installing the Tabletop Conversion Kit” on page 40.
36
Installing the Autoloader or Library
WARNING!
The SL24 Tape Autoloader weighs up to 15.6 kg (34.3 lb) without media and up to 20.4 kg (44.9 lb)
with media (24 cartridges). The SL48 Tape Library weighs up to 24.6 kg (54.1 lb) without media
and up to 34.2 kg (75.2 lb) with media (48 cartridges).
When moving the Autoloader or Library, to reduce the risk of personal injury or damage to the
Autoloader or Library: 1) observe local health and safety requirements and guidelines for manual
material handing, 2) always remove all tapes to reduce the overall weight of the Autoloader or
Library, and 3) obtain adequate assistance to lift and stabilize the Autoloader or Library during
installation or removal.
The device easily installs into racks with vertical mounting rails with 10–32 threaded holes in the rack
column (Sun StorEdge Expansion Cabinet), M6 threaded holes in the rack column (Sun Rack 900 and
1000), and racks having 9.5 mm square holes in the rack column (Sun StorageTek Rack). You will need a
#2 Phillips screwdriver, a small flat screwdriver, the two rack rails, and one or more hardware packets.
11420
Figure 16 Rack kit
Hardware packets:
• Racks having vertical mounting rails with 10–32 threaded holes in the rack column (Sun
StorEdge Expansion Cabinet): You will need the packet of alignment pins marked 10–32
threaded‐hole rack and the Standard rack hardware packet.
• Racks having M6 threaded holes in the rack column (Sun Rack 900 and 1000): You will need
the Standard rack hardware packet.
• Racks having vertical mounting rails with 9.5 mm square holes in the rack column (Sun
StorageTek Rack): You will need the packet of alignment pins and clip nuts marked 9.5 mm
square‐hole rack and the Standard rack hardware packet.
To install the rails into the rack:
1.
Customize the rails for your rack.
Racks with 10–32 threaded holes in the rack column: Use a flat screwdriver to replace the two
alignment pins on the front and back of each rail with the pins from the 10–32 threaded‐hole rack
packet, as shown in Replacing alignment pins.
Racks with M6 threaded holes in the rack column: Insert a clip nut from the Standard rack
hardware packet onto the back of the large hole in the front of each rail, as shown in Attaching
the clip nut to the rail.
Racks with 9.5 mm square holes in the rack column: Use a flat screwdriver to replace the two
alignment pins on the front and back of each rail with the pins from the 9.5 mm square‐hole
rack packet, as shown in Replacing alignment pins. Insert a clip nut from the Standard rack
hardware packet onto the back of the large hole in the front of each rail, as shown in Attaching
the clip nut to the rail.
User and service guide
37
11421
Figure 17 Replacing alignment pins
11422
Figure 18 Attaching the clip nut to the rail
2.
38
Using two screws with separate washers from the Standard rack hardware packet and a #2
Phillips screwdriver, secure the front of one rail to the front of the rack, as shown in Securing
the rails to the rack. Extend the rail and secure the back of the rail to the rack using two screws
with separate washers from the Standard rack hardware packet. Secure the other rail in a
similar manner.
Installing the Autoloader or Library
11423
Figure 19 Securing the rails to the rack
3.
Skip this step if you are installing an SL24 Autoloader or installing an SL48 Library into a rack
with 10–32 threaded holes in the rack column.
Racks having vertical mounting rails with M6 threaded holes in the rack column (Sun Rack 900
and 1000): On the front of the rack, install one clip nut from the Standard rack hardware packet
on each side in the upper location shown in Clip nut location. These will be used to secure the
Library to the rack.
Racks having vertical mounting rails with 9.5 mm square holes in the rack column (Sun
StorageTek Rack): On the front of the rack, install one clip nut from the 9.5 mm square‐hole rack
packet on each side in the upper location shown in Clip nut location. These will be used to
secure the Library to the rack.
1
4
5
2
1
2
3
5
11425
Figure 20 Clip nut location
1. Clip nut location
2. Rail screw location
3. Bottom of the Library
4. U marker
5. Alignment pin location
To install the device on the rails and into the rack:
1.
Locate the captive screws on the front bezel (see Figure 21). The SL24 Tape Autoloader has two
captive screws, as shown. The SL48 Tape Library has four captive screws.
2.
Slide the device onto the rails.
User and service guide
39
3.
From the front of the device, secure the front bezel to the rack using a #2 Phillips screw driver
placed through the small holes in the mounting bracket to tighten the captive screws on each
side of the device.
11344
Figure 21 Securing the Tape Autoloader or Library to the rack
Installing the Tabletop Conversion Kit
The Rack to Tabletop Conversion Kit for the SL24 Tape Autoloader and SL48 Tape Library supports
the edges of the Tape Library, but is not a structural top.
IMPORTANT:
You may not place any weight on top of the SL24 Tape Autoloader or SL48 Tape Library, even
with the cover installed.
To install the cover:
1.
Place the cover on a flat, level surface behind the device.
2.
Slide the device into the cover until the front panel of the device is aligned with the cover (see
Figure 22).
11349
Figure 22 Installing the tabletop conversion cover
3.
40
Tighten the captive screws on the front panel until the cover is secure.
Installing the Autoloader or Library
Installing additional tape drives
If you purchased additional tape drives for the Autoloader or Library, you can install them now or
wait until after the Autoloader or Library installation is complete.
To install tape drives:
1.
Locate an appropriate vacant drive bay on the back of the Autoloader or Library.
• SL24: The first tape drive should be installed in the bottom drive bay. If the first tape drive is a
half‐height tape drive, you can install an additional half‐height tape drive in the top bay.
• SL48: The first tape drive should be installed in the bottom drive bay. Install each additional
tape drive in drive bay directly above the existing tape drives. If you leave a space and later
add a tape drive in the space, the new tape drive will be assigned the next higher drive
number, leaving the tape drives numbered out of order. If the settings are restored to the
factory defaults or the Library is power‐cycled, the drives will be renumbered and you might
need to update the configuration of your backup servers.
NOTE:
If you plan to partition the Library into two logical libraries, the second tape drive must be
installed in the third half‐height drive bay. For tape drive locations for two logical libraries, see
Table 10 on page 23.
Remove the face plate covering the drive bay by removing the screws holding it in place. Remove
one drive bay cover to install a half‐height tape drive; remove two drive bay covers to install a
full‐height tape drive.
2.
Holding the tape drive by the handle and supporting it from the bottom, slide the tape drive into
the drive bay until it is flush with the back of the Autoloader or Library as shown in Figure 23.
10807
Figure 23 Installing a tape drive
3.
Tighten the blue captive screws with your fingers to secure the tape drive to the chassis.
Installing a redundant power supply
If you have a redundant power supply for the SL48 Tape Library, you may install it now or wait until
the installation process is complete.
To install the redundant power supply:
1.
Verify that the power to the Library is off and the power cord is not attached.
User and service guide
41
2.
On the back of the Library, locate the second power supply bay, which is right above the existing
power supply.
3.
Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove the screws that attach the bay cover to the chassis.
4.
Position the new power supply on the alignment rails and push it into the Library until it is flush
with the back panel, as shown in Figure 24.
11395
Figure 24 Installing the new power supply
5.
Tighten the blue thumbscrews by hand to secure the power supply to the chassis as shown in
Figure 25.
11263
Figure 25 Redundant power supply thumbscrews
Changing the SCSI address (parallel SCSI drives only)
The pre‐configured SCSI address for all full‐height tape drives is 4. For half‐height drives, the bottom
drive of any pair has SCSI address 4 and the top drive has SCSI address 5. If these pre‐configured
addresses will not be unique on a bus, you must change the SCSI ID of one or more tape drives.
To change the SCSI ID:
1.
Plug the power cord into the power connector on the back panel and then plug the cord into
the power outlet.
2.
From the front panel, push the round power button to power on the device.
3.
From the front panel, set the new SCSI ID for any drives that must have a
different SCSI ID. For the SL24, see “Changing the SCSI address — parallel
SCSI devices (Configuration > Change Drive)” on page 98. For the SL48, see
“Changing the drive configuration (Configuration > Drives)” on page 123.
4.
Power off the device by pushing the power button on the front panel.
42
Installing the Autoloader or Library
Connecting the parallel SCSI cable (parallel SCSI devices
only)
NOTE:
LTO‐3 and LTO‐4 tape drives are Ultra 320 SCSI LVD devices. Use only cables and terminators
specified for Ultra 320 or labeled as MultiMode. LTO‐2 tape drives are Ultra 160 SCSI LVD/SE
devices; use only cables and terminators specified for Ultra 160 or Ultra 320, or labeled as
MultiMode.
To connect the parallel SCSI cable to the device:
1.
Sun recommends that the host server be powered off before attaching new devices.
2.
Attach one end of the parallel SCSI cable (included in the accessory package) to one of the
connectors on the back panel of the tape drive (see Figure 26).
10777
Figure 26 Attaching the parallel SCSI cable to the tape drive
3.
Attach the other end of the parallel SCSI cable to the connector on the parallel SCSI host bus
adapter or to the connector on the previous device on the parallel SCSI bus.
NOTE:
The host bus adapter should be Low Voltage Differential Signaling (LVDS). A
Single‐Ended (SE) SCSI host bus adapter works, but severely degrades performance
and limits cable length. If any SE devices are on the same parallel SCSI bus, all of
the devices on the parallel SCSI bus slow to SE speed, which severely degrades
performance. Never attach the an LTO‐3 or LTO‐4 tape drive to an SE SCSI bus.
4.
Attach the terminator to the remaining parallel SCSI connector on the back panel of the tape drive
if the Autoloader or Library is the last or only device on the parallel SCSI bus. Otherwise, attach
one end of a parallel SCSI cable to the remaining port and the other end to the next device on the
parallel SCSI bus. Make sure the last device on the parallel SCSI bus is properly terminated.
Connecting the Fibre Channel cables (Fibre Channel devices
only)
Each tape drive has two FC ports.
NOTE:
Sun recommends that you cable Port A only and that you configure Port B for Auto Detect on
Fibre Speed and Port Type.
To connect the Fibre Channel cables to the Autoloader or Library:
User and service guide
43
1.
Remove the FC port caps if necessary. Attach one end of the Fibre Channel cable to Port A on the
tape drive as shown in Figure 27.
11207
Figure 27 Attaching the Fibre Channel cable
2.
Attach the other end of the FC cable to a switch or HBA.
Connecting the SAS cable (SAS devices only)
To connect the SAS cable to the device:
1.
Plug the HBA end of the SAS cable into the connector on the HBA. If you are using a SAS fanout
cable, the end of the cable with only one connector, shown facing backwards in Figure 28, should
be plugged into the connector on the HBA.
11622
Figure 28 Example SAS fanout cable
2.
If you are using a cable with a single connector on each end, plug the other end into the connector
on the tape drive.
If you are using a SAS fanout cable, plug one mini‐SAS connector into the connector on each tape
drive. The unused ends of the SAS fanout cable are single channel and not suitable for use with
disk arrays. Use the other ends to connect tape drives, or coil and secure them to the rack to
minimize stress on the connectors.
NOTE:
Each of the tape drives uses one channel and the cable supplied with the SL24 Tape Autoloader or
SL48 Tape Library maps each of the four channels from the HBA to one channel on the drive end.
You can plug any of the four drive connectors into any tape drive.
44
Installing the Autoloader or Library
Powering on the device
WARNING!
This product can only be used with a Sun‐approved power cord for your specific geographic
region. Use of an non‐Sun‐approved power cord may result in: 1) not meeting individual country
specific safety requirements; 2) insufficient conductor ampacity that could result in overheating
with potential personal injury and/or property damage; and 3) an unapproved power cord could
fracture resulting in the internal contacts being exposed, which potentially could subject the user
to a shock hazard. Sun disclaims all liability in the event a non‐Sun‐approved power cord is used.
To power on the Autoloader or Library:
1.
To use the web‐based management interface, connect an Ethernet cable to a working LAN
connection and to the Ethernet connector on the back of the Autoloader or Library.
2.
Attach the power cable to the power connector on the back panel of the Autoloader or Library
(see Figure 29).
To HBA
10774
Figure 29 Attaching the power cord
3.
Plug the power cable into the nearest properly grounded power outlet.
4.
Power on the device using the power button. Check the LCD screen to make sure it has power. If
not, check the power connections and your power source. During the Power On Self Test (POST),
all four LEDs are illuminated briefly, followed by a flashing Ready LED. When the initialization
sequence is complete, the Home screen is displayed. If the inventory takes over five minutes, the
splash screen is displayed. Press any button to see the Home screen.
5.
Plug in the host server and all attached devices.
6.
Power on any other devices you powered off earlier.
7.
Power on the server.
Configuring the device
Now that the Autoloader or Library is connected to the host and powered on, configure it for your
environment.
To configure the Autoloader or Library from the operator control panel (OCP):
1.
Set the administrator password. Setting the administrator password keeps unauthorized people
from taking tapes out of the device. You must set the administrator password to manage
the device with the remote management interface (RMI). (For the SL24, see “Changing the
administrator password (Configuration > Change Admin Password)” on page 96. For the SL48,
see “Changing the administrator password (Configuration > Set Admin Password)” on page 123.)
User and service guide
45
2.
Set the date and time. The date and time are used by the Autoloader or Library to record
events and should be set during the initial installation process. (For the SL24, see “Setting
the date and time (Configuration > Autoloader Date/Time)” on page 100. For the SL48, see
“Setting the Library date and time (Configuration > Set Date and Time)” on page 125.)
3.
Configure the network. Configuring the network enables you to monitor, configure,
and control Autoloader or Library functions from the RMI. By default, the device
will obtain an IP address from an IPv4 DHCP server. You can configure the device
to use a static IP address. Once the device has the IP address, you can change the
network configuration from the OCP or RMI. (For the SL24, see “Configuring network
settings (Configuration > Configure Network Settings)” on page 101. For the SL48, see
“Changing the network configuration (Configuration > Network Configuration)” on page 123.)
The device supports IPv4 and IPv6. By default, the device is configured to use IPv4, the most
common version. You can enable IPv6 or both Internet Protocols from the OCP or RMI. You must
finish configuring IPv6 from the RMI. (See “Changing the network configuration” on page 73.)
4.
Configure the Fibre Channel ports (Fibre Channel tape drives only). Sun recommends leaving the
Fibre Channel ports at the default settings:
• Fibre speed: Automatic
• Port type: Auto Detect
The drive will choose the appropriate settings. To change the settings from the remote
management interface, see “Changing the drive configuration” on page 72. To change
the settings from the operator control panel, see “Changing the drive configuration
— Fibre Channel devices (Configuration > Change Drive)” on page 98 for the SL24 or
“Changing the drive configuration (Configuration > Drives)” on page 123 for the SL48.
Verifying the connection
To verify the connection between the host computer and the Autoloader or Library:
1.
Install the application software and/or drivers that are compatible with the Autoloader or Library.
Backup software packages may require additional software or licensing to communicate with
the robotics.
2.
Verify the connection between the Autoloader or Library and the host:
• Confirm that the host server’s operating system recognized the device in Microsoft®
Windows® XP, Windows® Server 2003 or in Windows 2000® by going to: Settings >
Control Panel > System > Hardware > Device Manager > Tape Drive and/or Media
Changer.
For more information on verifying the connection of parallel SCSI devices, consult the operating
system documentation.
Labeling and loading the tape cartridges
Before using your new Autoloader or Library you must load tape cartridges into the magazines.
To prepare your tape cartridges and load them into the Autoloader or Library:
1.
Obtain tape cartridges compatible with your Autoloader or Library. (See
“Tape cartridges” on page 49.)
2.
Label any unlabeled tape cartridges to improve inventory time. (See
“Labeling tape cartridges” on page 50.)
46
Installing the Autoloader or Library
3.
Remove one of the magazines from the Autoloader or Library with the RMI or OCP:
• RMI: see “Releasing and replacing the magazines” on page 81.
• SL24 OCP: see “Unlocking, removing, and replacing magazines (Operations > Unlock Left
or Right Magazine)” on page 104.
• SL48 OCP: see “Unlocking, removing, and replacing magazines (Operations > Unlock Left
or Right Magazine)” on page 104.
The Autoloader or Library will not perform any other action while a magazine is out of the device.
4.
Insert the tape cartridges into the magazine. (See “Magazines” on page 52.)
5.
Slide the magazine into the Autoloader or Library.
6.
Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each of the other magazines.
Verifying the installation
Verify that the device has the current firmware revision.
To see the firmware revision on the SL24 front panel:
1.
From the Home screen, press Next until the display shows Status/Information. Press Enter.
2.
Press Next until the display shows Autoloader Information. Press Enter.
3.
Press Next until the display shows the Firmware Rev.
To see the firmware revision on the SL48 front panel:
1.
Use the control keys to navigate to Info > Identity > Library.
2.
The Library Controller FW Revision field shows the Library firmware revision.
To find the current firmware revision, visit the SunSolve website: http://www.sunsolve.sun.com.
If necessary, update the device firmware:
• From the RMI, see “Determining and updating firmware ” on page 83.
• From the SL24 OCP, see “Upgrading firmware (Support > Autoloader FW Upgrade, Support >
Drive FW Upgrade)” on page 109.
• From the SL48 OCP, see
“Updating library and drive firmware (Support > FW Upgrade)” on page 128.
Configuring additional features
The Autoloader or Library has many features to customize it for your organization.
• Partitioning an Autoloader or Library with multiple tape drives into logical libraries. See
“Changing the system configuration” on page 68
• Setting up email event notification. See “Setting event notification parameters” on page 78.
User and service guide
47
48
Installing the Autoloader or Library
3 Tape cartridges and magazines
This chapter explains which media to use with your Autoloader or Library, and how to label and
write‐protect your tape cartridges. Careful labeling and handling of the tape cartridges will prolong
the life of the tape cartridges and the Autoloader or Library.
Tape cartridges
Use the Ultrium data and cleaning tape cartridges designed for your model of Autoloader or Library.
To order data and cleaning cartridges, please use the contact information below to locate the nearest
Sun tape media reseller:
In the US contact 1‐877‐STK‐TAPE
In EAME contact 33 (0) 1 69 038341
nl
nl
NOTE:
The LTO‐3 and LTO‐4 tape drives support both rewriteable and WORM data cartridges.
Write‐Once, Read‐Many (WORM) data cartridges provide an enhanced level of data security
against accidental or malicious alteration of data on the tape cartridge. The WORM data
cartridge can be appended to maximize the full capacity of the tape cartridge, but you will
be unable to erase or overwrite data on the cartridge. WORM data cartridges are clearly
identified by their distinctive, two‐tone cartridge color. To check whether your backup
or archive software application supports WORM cartridges, see the following website:
http://www.sun.com/storagetek/tape_storage/tape_media/lto.
Using and maintaining tape cartridges
CAUTION:
Do not degauss Ultrium data cartridges! These data cartridges are pre‐recorded with a
magnetic servo signal. This signal is required to use the cartridge with the LTO tape drive. Keep
magnetically charged objects away from the cartridge.
To ensure the longest possible life for your data cartridges, follow these guidelines:
• Use only the data cartridges designated for your device.
• Clean the tape drive when the Clean drive LED is illuminated.
CAUTION:
Use only Ultrium Universal cleaning cartridges.
• Do not drop a cartridge. Excessive shock can damage the internal contents of the cartridge
or the cartridge case itself, making the cartridge unusable.
• Do not expose data cartridges to direct sunlight or sources of heat, including portable heaters
and heating ducts.
• The operating temperature range for data cartridges is 10 to 35º C. The storage temperature
range is ‐40 to +60º C in a dust‐free environment in which relative humidity is always between
20 percent and 80 percent (non‐condensing).
• If the data cartridge has been exposed to temperatures outside the specified ranges, stabilize
the cartridge at room temperature for the same length of time it was exposed to extreme
temperatures or 24 hours, whichever is less.
User and service guide
49
• Do not place data cartridges near sources of electromagnetic energy or strong magnetic
fields such as computer monitors, electric motors, speakers, or X‐ray equipment. Exposure
to electromagnetic energy or magnetic fields can destroy data and the embedded servo code
written on the media by the cartridge manufacturer, which can render the cartridge unusable.
• Place identification labels only in the designated area on the cartridge.
Labeling tape cartridges
The device contains a bar code reader that reads the tape labels and stores the inventory data in
memory. The device then provides the inventory information to the host application, OCP, and RMI.
Having a bar code label on each tape cartridge enables the bar code reader to identify the cartridge
quickly, thereby speeding up inventory time. Make it a practice to use bar code labels on your tape
cartridges.
TIP:
The bar code scanner must scan each tape or the back of the storage slot until it reads the bar code
label for the cartridge or storage slot, or determines that the slot is empty. The bar code scanner
can identify a properly labeled cartridge on the first scan. It can identify an empty slot on the
second scan. It will try several more scans and then tap on the cartridge before determining
that an unlabeled cartridge is in the slot, which takes about four times as long as identifying a
properly labeled cartridge. Even if you do not need the bar code information, use bar code labels
to speed up inventory time.
A proper bar code label includes the Media ID in the last two characters of the bar code. If an LTO‐4
tape drive is installed in the Autoloader or Library or is in the removed state, the Autoloader or
Library will not load a cartridge with an LTO‐4 Media ID or an unlabeled cartridge into an earlier
generation tape drive.
Though not recommended, checking Ignore Barcode Media ID in the RMI Configuration > System
screen will keep the Autoloader or Library from interpreting bar code Media IDs.
Your host software may need to keep track of the following information via the associated bar code:
• Date of format or initialization
• Tape’s media pool
• Data residing on the tape
• Age of the backup
• Errors encountered while using the tape (to determine if the tape is faulty)
Ultrium tape cartridges have a recessed area located on the face of the cartridge next to the
write‐protect switch. Use this area for attaching the adhesive‐backed bar code label. Only apply
labels as shown:
11894
11895
50
Tape cartridges and magazines
IMPORTANT:
The bar code label should only be applied as shown, with the alphanumeric portion facing the
hub side of the tape cartridge. Never apply multiple labels onto a cartridge because extra labels
can cause the cartridge to jam in a tape drive.
Write‐protecting tape cartridges
All rewriteable data cartridges have a write‐protect switch to prevent accidental erasure or overwriting
of data. Before loading a cartridge into the device, make sure the write‐protect switch on the front of
the cartridge is in the desired position.
• Slide the switch to the left to allow the device to write data to the cartridge (see Figure 30, 1).
• Slide the switch to the right to write‐protect the cartridge. An indicator, such as a red mark or
small padlock, is visible showing that the cartridge is write‐protected (see Figure 30, 2).
5
1
2
3
4
10454
Figure 30 Write‐protecting the data cartridge
1. Write‐enabled
2. Write‐protected
3. Write‐protect switch
4. Bar code label
5. Insertion arrow
Backward read compatibility
Table 15 Backward read compatibility
LTO‐1 drive
LTO‐2 drive
LTO‐3 drive
LTO‐4 drive
LTO‐1 media
Read/Write
Read/Write
Read only
Incompatible
LTO‐2 media
Incompatible
Read/Write
Read/Write
Read only
LTO‐3 media
Incompatible
Incompatible
Read/Write
Read/Write
LTO‐4 media
Incompatible
Incompatible
Incompatible
Read/Write
CAUTION:
LTO‐2 and LTO‐3 tape drives require the most recent firmware to immediately identify LTO‐4
media. Without the most recent firmware, loading an LTO‐4 cartridge into an earlier generation
drive may result in a long media identification and unload time. The drive may not identify the
media and return a load error before the application software times out waiting for the load. For
proper operation, keep your tape drives updated to the most recent firmware.
User and service guide
51
Magazines
The device has removable magazines. Magazine access is password protected. For safety reasons, the
robotic motion is stopped when a magazine is removed.
The magazines can be released using the operator control panel (OCP), the remote management
interface (RMI), or by a manual release. Sun recommends that you release the magazine using the
OCP or RMI. The magazine must only be removed manually when the OCP or RMI process has failed,
or the device no longer has power.
IMPORTANT:
To manually release a magazine, see “Releasing the magazines manually” on page 150. However,
this manual process should only be used if the magazine cannot be released using the operator
control panel or the remote management interface.
The slot numbering scheme for the SL24 is shown in Figure 31.
11
10
9
8
6
5
4
7
3
2
1
M1
23
22
19
15
21
18
14
20
17
13
16
12
10771
Figure 31 SL24 slot numbering with the single mailslot enabled
When the mailslot is disabled, the mailslot (M1) becomes Slot 1 and all other slots are re‐numbered
accordingly.
On the SL48, the storage slots are numbered starting with the of the lower‐left magazine, as shown in
Figure 32.
52
Tape cartridges and magazines
24
23
22
21
19
18
17
48
47
44
20
16
46
43
40
15
39
14
38
13
12
11
10
9
41
36
8
7
6
5
45
42
4
37
35
32
28
3
34
31
27
2
33
30
26
1
29
25
11387
Figure 32 SL48 slot numbering with mailslot disabled
When the SL48 mailslot is enabled, all of the storage slot numbers are adjusted, as shown in Figure 33.
The storage slots in the other magazines are renumbered accordingly.
9
8
7
M3
M2
4
5
6
3
2
1
M1
Mailslot
11292
Figure 33 SL48 lower‐left magazine slot numbering with mailslot enabled
TIP:
For the slot numbering for your Autoloader or Library in its current configuration, see the RMI’s
“Status: Inventory page” on page 67.
User and service guide
53
54
Tape cartridges and magazines
4 Operating the Autoloader or Library
The Autoloader or Library can be operated by the following methods:
• Remote management interface (RMI) — this interface lets you monitor and control the
Autoloader or Library from a web page. You can access most Autoloader or Library functions
from the RMI.
• Operator control panel (OCP) — this interface lets you operate the device from the front panel.
• Host backup software — You can perform any functions provided by the backup software.
NOTE:
The device’s network settings must be configured and the administrator password set to use the
RMI.
Remote management interface (RMI)
Overview
The remote management interface (RMI) lets you monitor and control your device through the World
Wide Web (WWW). The RMI hosts a dedicated, protected Internet site that displays a graphical
representation of your device.
Before using the RMI, you must configure the device’s networking and set the administrator
password with the OCP. (See “Configuring network settings (Configuration > Configure Network
Settings)” on page 101 and “Changing the administrator password (Configuration > Change Admin
Password)” on page 96.)
To start the RMI, open any HTML browser and enter the IP address of the device in the browser’s
address bar.
TIP:
Check the Help screens in the RMI for additional information. The help pages are updated
with most firmware updates and often contain technical details that are not contained in this
document. To access RMI help, click Help on the right side of the Web page banner, as shown in
“Getting help” on page 58.
The following functions are available through the remote management interface:
• “Identity ” on page 58
• “Viewing static device information” on page 58
• “Viewing static drive information” on page 60
• “Viewing network information” on page 62
• “Status” on page 63
• “Viewing dynamic device information” on page 63
• “Viewing dynamic drive information” on page 64
• “Viewing the tape cartridge inventory ” on page 67
• “Configuration” on page 68
• “Changing the system configuration” on page 68
• “Changing the drive configuration” on page 72
• “Changing the network configuration” on page 73
User and service guide
55
•
•
•
•
•
•
“Configuration: Network Management” on page 75
“Changing the administrative password” on page 76
“Setting date/time” on page 77
“Setting error log mode” on page 77
“Setting event notification parameters” on page 78
“Saving and restoring the Autoloader or Library configuration and restoring factory
defaults” on page 78
• “Operations” on page 80
• “Moving media” on page 80
• “Updating the current media inventory” on page 81
• “Releasing and replacing the magazines” on page 81
• “Support” on page 82
• “Performing general diagnostics” on page 82
• “Service ‐ Service restricted” on page 83
• “Determining and updating firmware ” on page 83
• “Rebooting the device” on page 83
• “Viewing logs” on page 84
• “Cleaning tape drive” on page 85
• “Sun Service link” on page 85
Login
To login, select the Account Type, enter a password if required, and then click Sign In. See Figure 34.
Figure 34 RMI login page
The Account Types are:
• User — no password is required (leave the password box blank).
• Administrator — the administrator password is required. The same administrator password is
used for the RMI and OCP. There is not a default administrator password; the administrator
password must be set with the OCP before it can be used with the RMI. If the administrator
password is lost, contact Sun technical support to generate a temporary password that will
grant administrator access.
• Service —access to this level is by Service personnel only. The service password is set at the
factory. The same service password is used for the RMI and OCP.
The user login provides access to the Identity and Status options, but not the Configuration,
Operations, and Support options. Administrator level provides access to all screens except for the
Log configuration and Service screens.
56
Operating the Autoloader or Library
TIP:
By default, the administrator password is unset; all of the digits are null. You must set the
administrator password from the OCP to protect the administrator functions on the OCP and
enable the administrator functions in the RMI.
Status pane
The System Status pane (see Figure 35) shows the current device and drive status. The System Status
pane for the SL48 also shows the power supply status.
Figure 35 System Status pane
The System Status pane displays the following:
• Updated time — the day, date, and time of the most recent status view. This timestamp comes
from your computer and may be different from the Autoloader or Library Time at the bottom
of the pane. Click your browser’s reload button to refresh the system status.
• Autoloader or Library Name — the name of the device, which was set in the Configuration:
System screen.
• Status of the Autoloader or Library and tape drives
The green Status Ok icon indicates that the device is fully operational and that no user
intervention is required.
The blue exclamation point Status Warning icon indicates that user intervention is necessary,
but that the device can still perform most operations.
The red X Status Error icon indicates that user intervention is required and that the device is
not capable of performing some operations.
• Slots (Free/Total) — Free is the number of empty storage slots. Total is the number of storage
slots available to the host software, which does NOT include reserved slots.
• Mailslot — shows whether the mailslot is open, closed, or disabled.
• Autoloader or Library Time — the date and time from the Autoloader or Library, which can be
set from the OCP or RMI. The Autoloader or Library Time is updated when the system status
is refreshed. The time of the most recent refresh is the Updated time at the top of the pane. If
you call Service to request a temporary administrator password, refresh the system status with
your browser reload button and then give the service engineer this Autoloader or Library Time.
• Power Supply Status (SL48)
• Online — The power supply is installed.
• Installed, failed — The power supply installed in the unit is not working and the Library no
longer has redundant power. The power supply should be replaced.
User and service guide
57
NOTE:
If the SL48 has two power supplies and one fails, after a power cycle the Library will not
recognize the failed power supply as installed in the Library.
The number of power supplies installed in the Library is displayed next to the icon.
Getting help
For additional information about fields on the RMI screens, click on Help in the upper right corner
(see Figure 36). The help pages are updated with most firmware updates and often contain technical
details that are not contained in this document.
Figure 36 Help button
Identity
Viewing static device information
The Identity: Library page provides static information about the device.
Figure 37 Identity: Library or Autoloader page
When the Library or Autoloader is partitioned into multiple logical libraries, the information for the
Library or Autoloader and the logical libraries is presented as shown in Figure 38.
58
Operating the Autoloader or Library
Figure 38 Identity: Library or Autoloader page with two logical libraries
You can see, but not modify, the following:
• Serial Number — the electronic serial number for the device. It should match the serial
number printed on the device’s label, located on the pull out tab under the drive on the back of
the device. When the device is configured into multiple logical libraries, the serial number
includes the serial number on the device and the logical library number.
• Product ID — how the device identifies itself to the host computer.
• Currently Installed Autoloader or Library Firmware x.xx / y.yy
• x.xx is the version of the Autoloader or Library controller firmware
• y.yy is the version of the robotics firmware.
• Bootcode Firmware Revision
• Autoloader or Library Mode
• Automatic — the device will switch from Sequential to Random mode if it receives media
changer SCSI commands.
• Manual — the device will stay in the current mode until another mode is configured by a
user.
• Random — the device will not automatically load and unload tapes. Instead, it will wait for
commands from the backup software or the OCP to load and unload tapes.
• Sequential — the device will automatically unload the tape in the drive when the host
software sends an unload command to the drive and then automatically load the tape from
the next highest sequentially numbered full slot.
• Loop — in Loop mode, the Autoloader or Library will load the tape from the lowest
numbered full slot after the tape from the highest numbered full slot is unloaded. If Loop is
not listed, the Autoloader or Library will stop automatically loading and unloading tapes
after the tape from the last full slot is unloaded.
CAUTION:
Since loop mode will endlessly cycle through the tapes, it is possible to overwrite old data.
Make sure that there are enough tapes in the Autoloader or Library or that the tapes are
regularly rotated in and out to ensure that data you want to save is not overwritten.
User and service guide
59
• Autoload — the device will automatically load the tape from the lowest numbered full slot
on power up.
• WWide Node Name — a world wide unique identifier that the Autoloader or Library reports
over SCSI and may be used by operating systems or software applications to identify and track
the Autoloader or Library
Viewing static drive information
The Identity: Drive page (SCSI), Identity: Drive page (Fibre Channel), and Identity: Drive page (SAS)
provide detailed information about the tape drives. You will only see the fields that apply to the
interface type of the drives installed in this Autoloader or Library.
Figure 39 Identity: Drive page (parallel SCSI)
60
Operating the Autoloader or Library
Figure 40 Identity: Drive page (Fibre Channel)
Figure 41 Identity: Drive page (SAS)
You can see, but not modify, the following:
• Vendor ID — will always be HP.
• Product ID — product identification information that is given by the drive.
• Serial Number — electronic serial number of the drive. It should match the physical serial
number of the drive.
• Firmware Revision — version of the currently installed drive firmware.
User and service guide
61
• SCSI ID (parallel SCSI drive only) — SCSI address of the drive. The LUN for the tape drive is
0. If a drive is removed or powered down, its number will be reserved. If a drive is added
between two other drives, it is assigned the next available number. The drive numbers are
persistent until the factory defaults are restored or the Autoloader or Library is power cycled.
• World Wide ID (SAS drive only) — world wide unique name for the drive. The World Wide ID
is assigned by the autoloader or library controller to the drive bay and cannot be changed by the
user. When a tape drive is replaced, the World Wide ID is re‐assigned to the replacement drive.
• Physical Drive Slot Number — the physical location of the drive. By default, the drives are
numbered from the bottom of the Autoloader or Library up, starting with number 1.
• SCSI Element Address (parallel SCSI or SAS drive) or Element Address (FC drive) — element
address. The SCSI Element Address is set at the factory and can only be configured by a
host application.
• Autoloader or Library LUN Hosted by Drive — Yes, if this drive is hosting the Autoloader
or Library at LUN 1.
• Data Compression — Yes, if the host has hardware compression turned on for the drive.
• Interface Type — SCSI, Fibre Channel, or SAS
• WWide Node Name (FC drive only) — world wide unique number for the drive. The Library
assigns WWNames to the drive bays. When a tape drive is replaced, the WWName is
re‐assigned to the replacement drive.
• Port information for each configured port (FC drive only)
• WWide Port Name — world wide unique identifier for the port. The WW Node and Port
Name will be slightly different.
• Port Type — the current setting of the drive port. Direct connected devices are typically
Loop. Devices connected to a switch are typically Fabric.
• Speed
Viewing network information
The Identity: Network page displays information about the network configuration.
Figure 42 Identity: Network page
You can see, but not modify:
• MAC Address — a unique identifier for the autoloader or library controller’s network interface
62
Operating the Autoloader or Library
• Full Qualified Domain Name — the fully qualified domain name for the device
When IPv4 Addressing is Enabled, you can see, but not modify:
• IPv4 DNS Server 1 and IPv4 DNS Server 2 — addresses of the configured DNS servers used
when DHCP Addressing is not Enabled.
• DHCPv4 Addressing — When Enabled, the device will request an IP address from a DHCP
server each time the device is booted.
• IPv4 Address — the Autoloader or Library’s network address
• Subnet Mask — The network mask of the autoloader or library controller used when DHCP
Addressing is not Enabled.
• Default Gateway — the gateway used when DHCP Addressing is not Enabled.
When IPv6 Addressing is Enabled, you can see, but not modify:
• Stateless Addressing — when Enabled, the Autoloader or Library will generate an address for
itself based on the routing information obtained from a router advertisement and the MAC
address. The Autoloader or Library can manage up to five global addresses at the same time,
which can be assigned from different routers.
• DHCPv6 Addressing — when Enabled, the Autoloader or Library will request an IP address
from a DHCP server each time the device is booted.
• Static Addressing — when Enabled, the Autoloader or Library will use a statically‐configured
address.
• Static Assigned Address — the IPv6 address when Static Addressing Enabled is On.
Status
Viewing dynamic device information
The Status: Library page displays dynamic information about the device. When you click Refresh, the
status is updated immediately.
Figure 43 Status: Library or Autoloader page
You can see, but not modify, the following:
• Status — the overall status of the device
User and service guide
63
The device is operating normally.
The device is functional, but might have an issue that should be addressed.
The device is in a failed state.
• Cartridge in Transport — the slot number where the tape currently in the robot originated.
None if there is not a tape in the robotic.
• Odometer — the total number of moves the device has performed since its manufacture.
• Total Power On Time — the number of days, hours, and minutes that the device has been
powered on since its manufacture.
• Robotic Status — the current status of the robotics and a description of the operation the
robot is currently performing.
• Internal Temperature — the internal temperature reported by the device.
• Power Supply Status — the current status of each of the installed power supplies. (SL48)
• Online — The power supply is installed.
• Installed, failed — The power supply installed in the unit is not working and the Library no
longer has redundant power. The power supply should be replaced.
NOTE:
If the SL48 has two power supplies and one fails, after a power cycle the Library will not
recognize the failed power supply as installed in the Library.
The number of power supplies installed in the Library is displayed next to the icon.
• Media Removal — Prevented, if the backup software is preventing media removal from
the Autoloader or Library. When media removal is prevented, the mailslot and magazine
functionality is disabled.
• Left Magazine — Present, if the device senses the presence of the left magazine. (SL24)
• Level n. Left Magazine — Present, if the Library senses the presence of the left magazine at
level n. The magazine levels are numbered from the bottom of the Library to the top. For
example, Level 1. Left Magazine is the bottom magazine on the left side looking at the Library
from the front. (SL48)
• Right Magazine — Present, if the device senses the presence of the right magazine. (SL24)
• Level n. Right Magazine — Present, if the Library senses the presence of the right magazine at
level n. (SL48)
Viewing dynamic drive information
The Status: Drive page (parallel SCSI), Status: Drive page (Fibre Channel), and Status: Drive page
(SAS) provide detailed information about the drives present in the Autoloader or Library. When you
click Refresh, the status is updated immediately.
64
Operating the Autoloader or Library
Figure 44 Status: Drive page (parallel SCSI)
Figure 45 Status: Drive page (Fibre Channel)
User and service guide
65
Figure 46 Status: Drive page (SAS)
You can see, but not modify, the following:
• Status of the drive
The drive is operating normally.
The device is functional, but might have an issue that should be addressed.
The drive is in a failed state.
• Cartridge in Drive — information about the cartridge, if any, currently in the drive.
• Drive Error Code — the current drive error code if the drive is in a failed state. See
“Drive error codes” on page 165 for a list of drive error codes.
• Internal Drive Temperature — internal temperature reported by the drive. The normal
temperature range is provided for reference and varies depending on the type of tape drive.
The tape drive will send out errors if there is any possibility of error due to temperature.
NOTE:
The Internal Drive Temperature is not the temperature of the tape path in the drive nor is
this the operating environment temperature.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Cooling Fan Active — On if the cooling fan is on
Drive Activity — the current drive activity
Port A Status and Port B Status (Fibre Channel tape drives) — current status of the ports
Port A Status (SAS tape drives) — current status of the port
Speed (Fibre Channel and SAS drives) — the current speed setting of the drive port
Port Type (Fibre Channel drives only) — the current setting of the drive port. Direct connected
devices are typically Loop. Devices connected to a switch are typically Fabric.
• N‐Port ID (Fibre Channel drives only) — Fabric address. Only relevant when in Fabric mode.
• ALPA (Fibre Channel drives only) — Loop address. Only relevant when in Loop mode.
• Hashed SAS address — A short version of the SAS World Wide Identifier (WWI) that is
generated using a well‐defined hash algorithm and is suitable for device identification in most
systems. Some management software may report this value.
66
Operating the Autoloader or Library
Viewing the tape cartridge inventory
The Status: Inventory page provides detailed information about the tapes in the tape drives, with a
summary of tapes in magazine slots.
Figure 47 Status: Inventory page
A dark rectangle indicates a full slot, a red rectangle indicates a cartridge with a problem, and a
white rectangle indicates an empty slot.
To see detailed information about the tapes in a magazine, click on the + button to expand the display
for the magazine (see Figure 48).
User and service guide
67
Figure 48 Status: Inventory: Media details pane
In the media details pane,
• Slot # — lists “Mailslot” or the index number of each slot in the magazine from lowest to
highest.
• Attn — indicates an attention state for storage slots or provides information on the mailslot
state.
• Status — Full or Empty.
• In Drive — shows when the tape from this slot is in a drive.
• Label — the bar code label data for the tape in the slot.
• Media Loads — the number of times this tape has been loaded into a drive in its lifetime.
This field may be blank if the tape has not been loaded into a drive in this device or if the
inventory has changed.
• Comment — any additional information about the tape in the slot (for example, Clean Tape
if the cartridge is a cleaning tape).
Configuration
Changing the system configuration
Use the “Configuration: System page” on page 69 to modify the system configuration.
System configuration changes are only applied after the Apply Selections or the Submit button is
selected. After making the selection, a warning page informs you of the impact of the proposed
change. In some cases a pop‐up screen asks you to confirm the change. Many changes also require the
device to reboot. You may need to click Refresh to see the changes.
68
Operating the Autoloader or Library
Figure 49 Configuration: System page with one logical library
When the Autoloader or Library is configured into multiple logical libraries, the settings for the
Autoloader or Library are separated from those for each logical library, as shown in the Configuration:
System page.
User and service guide
69
Figure 50 Configuration: System page for two logical libraries
To enable logical libraries, select the number of logical libraries in the Logical Libraries pane and click
Apply in that pane. For more information about logical libraries, see “Logical libraries” on page 22.
The following settings affect all of the logical libraries:
• Mailslot Configuration — configures the mailslot in the lower left magazine as a mailslot or
storage slots. The SL24 mailslot has one slot; the SL48 mailslot has three slots. Enabling the
mailslot will reduce the total number of storage slots. The default is disabled.
If the mailslot is enabled, all logical libraries will have access to the mailslot. If allowing all
logical libraries access to the mailslot is a concern or all of the slots are needed as storage
slots, disable the mailslot.
CAUTION:
Since the mailslot is located where the lowest numbered storage slot would be, enabling and
disabling the mailslot will re‐number all of the other storage slots. After enabling or disabling
the mailslot, update the backup software inventory. You might also need to re‐configure the
backup software to adjust the number of storage slots and presence of the mailslot.
• Auto Clean Enabled — When auto clean is enabled, the device automatically loads a cleaning
cartridge when a tape drive needs to be cleaned. The Tape Autoloader or Tape Library can
load a cleaning cartridge from any logical library to any tape drive. The device identifies a
tape cartridge as a cleaning cartridge if it has a bar code label that starts with CLN or after an
unlabeled cleaning tape has been loaded into the tape drive.
70
Operating the Autoloader or Library
The Autoloader or Library can use a cleaning cartridge from any slot, even if the slot is not
active. The Autoloader or Library keeps track of the usage count for each of the cleaning
cartridges. When multiple cleaning cartridges are available, the Autoloader or Library will
first choose an unknown cleaning cartridge so the Autoloader or Library can start tracking
the cartridge’s usage count. If the Autoloader or Library knows the usage count for all of the
cleaning cartridges, the Autoloader or Library will choose the one with the highest usage count.
Auto cleaning is disabled by default. You can enable automatic cleaning even if there are no
cleaning cartridges in the device. In this case, the device will display a warning message.
CAUTION:
Only enable automatic cleaning in either the backup application or the Autoloader or Library,
not both.
• Barcode Label Length Reported to Host — the number of bar code characters reported to the
host application. This option provides interchange compatibility with libraries with more
limited bar code reading capabilities. The default is 8.
• Barcode Label Alignment Reported to Host — configures the end of the bar code label
characters to report to the host application when reporting fewer than the maximum number
of characters. For example, when reporting only six characters of the bar code label 12345678,
if alignment is left, the Autoloader or Library will report 123456. If alignment is right, the
Autoloader or Library will report 345678. The default is left.
• Ignore Barcode Media ID — when disabled, the barcode Media ID on the tape cartridges
will be checked by the Autoloader or Library. The Autoloader or Library will only allow
appropriate tape cartridges to be loaded into tape drives. The barcode Media ID is the last
two characters of the barcode. For example, an LTO‐4 labeled cartridge will not be allowed to
move into an LTO‐3 tape drive. See “Backward read compatibility” on page 51. When Ignore
Barcode Media ID is enabled, the Autoloader or Library will move any tape to any tape drive.
If the cartridge is incompatible with the tape drive, a message will be displayed. Sun strongly
recommends that all tape cartridges have barcodes with the correct Media ID.
• Magazine access using front panel ‐ Admin password required — when enabled, the
Administrator password is required to remove the magazines from the front panel. When
disabled, the magazines may be removed using the operator control panel without entering a
password. The default is to require the Administrator password.
The following settings are configurable for each logical library:
• Library LUN Hosted By Drive — specifies the master tape drive for the logical library. The
default is the lowest numbered tape drive in the logical library. If a logical library has only one
tape drive, it is the master drive for the logical library. If a logical library has more than one
tape drive, you may specify the master. The number is the physical drive number.
• Library Mode — specifies the library mode for each logical library. The default mode is
Automatic.
The Autoloader or Library supports three behavior modes: Random, Sequential, and
Automatic. The Autoloader or Library automatically detects the required mode from the series
of SCSI commands it receives; however, you can also change the mode. Choose the operating
mode based on the capabilities of the software controlling the tape cartridges.
Random mode — In Random mode, the device does not automatically load tapes into the
tape drives; it waits for commands from the software or operator to load and unload tapes.
Random mode is used with a full featured or a robotics‐aware backup application and is
the most common mode of operation. Your backup software must support robotics, which
may require an additional software module.
Sequential mode — In Sequential mode, the device automatically loads and unloads tapes
from the drive. Sequential mode is used when the backup software is NOT robotics‐aware
or was designed for standalone drives only.
In Sequential mode, the logical library will only use the lowest‐numbered tape drive in the
logical library.
The operator begins the sequence by loading the desired tape into the tape drive. When a tape
is unloaded for any reason, the device automatically removes the tape from the drive, returns
it to its original slot, then loads the tape from the next available higher numbered slot.
User and service guide
71
To further determine how you want tapes loaded into the tape drive while in Sequential mode,
you can set the Loop and Autoload options.
• When Autoload mode is set, the device automatically loads the cartridge from the
lowest‐numbered full slot into the tape drive. It then follows standard sequential operation.
• When Loop mode is on, the original first cartridge in the sequence is reloaded after the
device has cycled through all available cartridges. If Loop mode is off and the last cartridge
has been unloaded, the device stops loading cartridges until you load another manually.
CAUTION:
Use caution when choosing Loop mode because it makes it possible to overwrite data
on previously written cartridges.
When an Autoloader or Library is partitioned into logical libraries, each logical library operates
as an independent library. Thus, the Autoloader or Library only loads tapes from the slots
associated with one logical library into the tape drive associated with that logical library; it will
not load tapes from slots associated with another logical library. Only the lowest‐numbered
tape drive in a multi‐drive logical library will be used.
Automatic mode: In Automatic mode, the device switches from Sequential mode into Random
mode when it receives certain SCSI commands. Automatic mode is the default setting.
• Active Slots — The number of slots in the logical library that are available to the backup
software. You can store cleaning tapes in inactive slots, or leave inactive slots empty. The slots
are inactivated from the highest slot number down. The default is to make the maximum
number of slots active. Each logical library must have at least two active slots.
Changing the drive configuration
This page shows the current configuration of all drives and allows modification to the configuration.
You can also select Power on through this page. (See Configuration: Drive page (parallel SCSI),
Configuration: Drive page (Fibre Channel), or Configuration: Drive page (SAS)).
Figure 51 Configuration: Drive page (parallel SCSI)
For each parallel SCSI drive, you may change the
• SCSI ID — the SCSI address for a parallel SCSI tape drive.
• Power On — power the tape drive on or off.
72
Operating the Autoloader or Library
Figure 52 Configuration: Drive page (Fibre Channel)
For a Fibre Channel tape drive, you can use this screen to configure the FC ports. The port
fields are:
• Speed — Automatic, 1 Gb/s, 2 Gb/s, or 4 Gb/s. The default is Automatic.
• Port Type — Automatic, Fabric (N), or Loop (NL). Direct connected devices are typically Loop.
Devices connected to a switch are typically Fabric. The default is Automatic.
• Addressing Mode — addressing mode when the port type is Loop: Hard, Soft, or Hard
auto‐select. If the Addressing Mode is Hard, you must configure a fixed ALPA address that is
unique on the loop. If the Addressing Mode is Soft, the system will assign an ALPA during
fabric login. If the Addressing mode is Hard auto‐select, the device will acquire an ALPA at
the initial system setup and then fix that as a hard address from then on.
• ALPA — Arbitrated Loop Port Address
Figure 53 Configuration: Drive page (SAS)
Changing the network configuration
Use the Configuration: Network page to modify the current network configuration. When you request
a change, a pop‐up box will ask you to confirm the changes.
User and service guide
73
Figure 54 Configuration: Network page
You may change the:
• Protocol version — selects the Internet Protocols that will be enabled. Select IPv4 only, IPv6
only, or both IPv4 and IPv6 protocols. The default is the IPv4 protocol only.
• Host Name — enter the host name provided by your network administrator for the Autoloader
or Library.
• Domain name — enter the domain name provided by your network administrator for the
Autoloader or Library.
• Enable HTTPS — when On, the RMI can only be accessed through an HTTPS connection.
For IPv4, you may change the:
• DHCP Address — when On, the Autoloader or Library will request an IP address from a
DHCP server each time the device is booted. The default is On.
• Static Address — configures the IP address if DHCP is not enabled.
74
Operating the Autoloader or Library
• Subnet Mask — configures the network mask of the autoloader or library controller if DHCP
Address is not On.
• Gateway Address — configures the gateway address if DHCP Address is not On.
• IPv4 DNS Server 1 and IPv4 DNS Server 2 — configures the addresses of up to two DNS
servers if DHCP Address is not On.
For IPv6, you may change the:
• IPv6 DNS Server 1 and IPv6 DNS Server 2 — configures the addresses of up to two DNS
servers if DHCPv6 is not enabled.
• Stateless Addressing Enabled — when On, the Autoloader or Library will generate an address
for itself based on the routing information obtained from a router advertisement and the MAC
address. The Autoloader or Library can manage up to five global addresses at the same time,
which can be assigned from different routers. The default is On.
• DHCPv6 Addressing Enabled — when On, the Autoloader or Library will request an IP
address from a DHCP server each time the device is booted. The default is Off.
• Static Addressing Enabled — when On, the Autoloader or Library will use a
statically‐configured address. The default is Off.
• Static Assigned Address — configures the address when Static Addressing Enabled is On. You
can select the standard prefix, FE80:, or the prefix of a nearby router. Enter the remainder of
the address and click Add.
To remove an IPv6 static IP address, click Delete next to the address in the Current IPv6 Addresses
pane.
Configuration: Network Management
Use the Configuration: Network Management page to enable and configure SNMP (Simple Network
Management Protocol), which allows network management applications to manage the device. The
device supports both SNMP configuration and SNMP traps. SNMP can only be configured with
the RMI; it cannot be configured with the OCP.
User and service guide
75
Figure 55 Configuration: Network Management page
You may change the:
• SNMP Enabled — When checked, the device can be managed by computers listed in the
SNMP Target IP Addresses field.
• SNMP Target IP Addresses — the IP addresses for up to three computers running IPv4 SNMP
management software and up to three computers running IPv6 SNMP management software.
IP addresses will not be cleared if SNMP is disabled, but those targets will no longer be able to
manage the Autoloader or Library and will not receive traps from the Autoloader or Library.
You can select the SNMP version for each target address.
• Community Name — a string used to match the SNMP management station and device. It
must be set to the same name on both the management station and the Autoloader or Library.
The default community name is public.
• SNMP Trap Notification Filter — the types of events for which the device should send SNMP
traps.
Changing the administrator password
Use the Configuration: Password page to change the administrator password for the RMI and OCP.
76
Operating the Autoloader or Library
NOTE:
You must set the administrator password with the OCP before you can access
administrator functionality in the RMI. For SL24, see “Changing the administrator
password (Configuration > Change Admin Password)” on page 96. For SL48, see
“Changing the administrator password (Configuration > Set Admin Password)” on page 123.
Figure 56 Configuration: Password page
The password is exactly eight numbers, each between 0 and 9.
Setting the date and time
Use the Configuration: Date/Time page to set the date and time. The time is based on a 24–hour
clock, where 1:00 pm is 13:00.
NOTE:
The Autoloader or Library does not adjust its time to daylight saving time; the time must be
adjusted manually.
Figure 57 Configuration: Date/Time page
Setting error log mode
The Configuration: Log page can only be accessed by Service personnel.
User and service guide
77
Figure 58 Configuration: Log page
Setting event notification parameters
The Configuration: Alerts page lets you configure e‐mail notification of Autoloader or Library events.
Figure 59 Configuration: Alerts page
You may change the:
• Notification Level — the types of events for which the device should send e‐mail
• To Email Address — the address to which to send the reported events (e.g.
firstname.lastname@example.com). Only one email address can be configured.
• Email Domain — domain of the return e‐mail address (e.g. example.com)
• SMTP Server Address — IP address of the SMTP server
Saving and restoring the Autoloader or Library configuration and restoring factory
defaults
Use the Configuration: Restore defaults page to restore the factory defaults, reset the administrator
password to null, or save the Autoloader or Library configuration database to a file. The device will
perform an inventory after the defaults are restored.
78
Operating the Autoloader or Library
IMPORTANT:
Once you reset the administrator password to null, you will not be able to access the administrator
functions in the RMI until you set an administrator password through the OCP. To change the
administrator password, use “Configuration: Password page” on page 77.
The saved configuration database will make it easier to recover the Autoloader or Library
configuration if you need to replace the chassis or library controller. This feature is also useful when
installing multiple devices. Either save the configuration before configuring the network or ensure
that only one device with the same network configuration is on the network at a time until they have
unique network identities.
NOTE:
You can save the Autoloader or Library configuration to a USB flash drive from
the OCP. For the SL24, see “Saving and restoring the Autoloader configuration
(Configuration > Save/Restore Configuration)” on page 103. For the SL48, see
“Saving and restoring the Library configuration (Configuration > Save/Restore)” on page 125.
Figure 60 Configuration: Restore defaults page
The restored factory default settings are:
• SCSI addresses:
• SL24: A full‐height tape drive has SCSI ID 4. The bottom half‐height tape drive has SCSI ID
4 and the top drive has SCSI ID 5.
• SL48: All full‐height tape drives have SCSI ID 4. Half‐height drive slots have SCSI ID
of 4, 5, 4, 5 from the bottom up.
• Fibre Channel drive configuration: Automatic speed, auto port type
• Master drive: reset to Drive 1 or the lowest numbered existing drive
• Drive power: all drives powered on
• Active slots: maximum possible
• Autoloader or Library mode: Automatic
• Loop: No
• Event log levels and filter: continuous trace and all levels and filters active (for Service use only)
• Barcode reader label length: 8
• Barcode reader alignment: Left
• Error recovery: On
User and service guide
79
• Mailslot configuration: mailslot disabled
• Auto clean: disabled
• SNMP: disabled, but saved addresses do not change
• E‐mail notification: disabled, but configurations retained
The following settings are not reset:
• Administrator password
• Network settings (network is always enabled and the network addresses are retained)
• Date and time
IMPORTANT:
When the defaults are restored, the Library will rediscover and renumber the tape drives from
the bottom of the Library up. If a tape drive was added between two other tape drives since the
last time the drives were discovered, that tape drive and the ones above it will be renumbered.
You might need to update the configuration of the backup application when tape drives are
renumbered.
To save the Library or Autoloader configuration to a file, click Save and follow the instructions on the
RMI to specify a file location.
To restore the Library or Autoloader configuration from a file, browse to the location of the saved
configuration file and click Restore.
The configuration settings that are saved to file are:
• Administrator password
• Mailslot configuration
• All network settings, including DHCP, DNS, IPv4 and IPv6 addresses
• Barcode reader label length and barcode reader alignment
• Reserved slots
• Display contrast setting (SL48 only)
• Library or Autoloader mode
• All drive configuration settings
• Auto clean
• SNMP addresses and configurations
• Log tracing configuration
• Email notification configuration (SMTP address, email address, filter level)
• Option to allow the magazine access without the administrator password
• Option to ignore the barcode media ID
• Logical library configuration
Operations
Moving media
Use the Operations: Move Media page to move tape cartridges within the device.
IMPORTANT:
Moving media manually can interfere with backup software operations. Ensure backups are
complete before moving media.
80
Operating the Autoloader or Library
Figure 61 Operations: Move Media page
To move a tape, select the source and destination and then click the Move button in the center of
the screen to start the move.
Updating the current media inventory
Use the Operations: Inventory page to have the device re‐scan the tapes to update the media inventory.
Figure 62 Operations: Inventory page
Releasing and replacing the magazines
Use the Operations: Magazine page to release the right or left magazine. When you click Release, the
device will unlock the magazine and display Left Magazine Unlocked or Right Magazine Unlocked
on the OCP screen. The magazine does not move until you pull it out of the device. If you do not
remove the magazine within a few seconds, the device will lock it. When you replace the magazine,
the device will inventory the magazine’s tape cartridges.
User and service guide
81
Figure 63 Operations: Magazines page
NOTE:
To manually release a magazine, see “Releasing the magazines manually” on page 150. However,
this manual process should only be used if the magazine cannot be released using the operator
control panel or the remote management interface.
Support
CAUTION:
Some RMI operations take the device offline. This inactive mode can interfere with host‐based
application software, causing data loss. Ensure that the device is idle before attempting to perform
any remote operations that take it offline.
Performing general diagnostics
Use the Support: General Diagnostic page to run general tests to verify the usability and reliability of
the device. Select the test and enter the number of test cycles before starting the test. To cancel the
test early, click on the Stop button.
Figure 64 Support: General Diagnostic page
The available tests are:
• Demo — moves cartridges from the slots to the drives and back. At the end of the test the
cartridges are returned to their original slots.
• Slot to slot — shuffles the cartridges between slots to exercise the robot. At the end of the test
the cartridges are NOT returned to their original slots.
The demo and slot to slot test are intended to show the device operating. For service and diagnostics,
execute the wellness test from the OCP. See “The wellness test” on page 151.
82
Operating the Autoloader or Library
Service the Autoloader or Library ‐ Service restricted
The Support: Service the Library page page can only be accessed by service personnel to execute
detailed tests on the different components of the device or special read/write diagnostics on the drives.
Figure 65 Support: Service the Library page
Determining and updating firmware
Use the Support: Firmware page to see the current version of the device and drive firmware, and
upload new firmware. The firmware files must have a .frm file extension. You can find firmware
patches on the SunSolve website: http://www.sunsolve.sun.com. After the firmware is updated, the
device or tape drive with updated firmware is reset.
CAUTION:
Do not interrupt the device while a firmware update is in progress. Updating the tape drive firmware
can take several minutes because the firmware is transferred through a serial connection.
Figure 66 Support: Firmware page
Rebooting the device
Use the Support: Reboot page to do a soft reset of the device, which will run the Power On Self Test
(POST) and scan for a new inventory. The RMI web page will refresh itself after a short time delay.
User and service guide
83
This time should be sufficient to reload the page. However, during a reboot, the connection to the
device may be lost. If the connection is lost, you will have to reload the page manually.
Figure 67 Support: Reboot page
Viewing logs
From the Support: Library Logs page you can see the Autoloader or Library logs. The available logs
are: Error Trace, Informational Trace, Warning Trace, Configuration Change Trace, and Standard Trace.
The log entries are displayed in order of most recent to oldest. The format for the log entries is:
YY.MM.DD HH.MM.SS.ss LIB/ERR<80 89 62 40
nl
• YY.MM.DD — the date displayed as Year.Month.Day
• HH.MM.SS.ss — the time displayed as Hour.Minute.Second.Hundredths of a second
• First code — hard or soft error. The code after LIB/ERR (80 in the example) will be 80 or 40. 80
indicates a hard error, 40 indicates a soft error.
• Second code — the main error code (89 in this example). See “Error codes” on page 153 for a
list of error codes and recovery procedures.
• Third code — the sub‐code (62 in this example). See “Error sub‐codes” on page 164 for
a list of sub‐codes.
• Fourth code — sub‐code‐specific information for factory use only
84
Operating the Autoloader or Library
Figure 68 Support: Library Logs page
Cleaning tape drives
Use the Support: Clean Drive page to clean the tape drives.
• Slot # — select the slot number of the cleaning tape
• Drive — select the drive to be cleaned
Figure 69 Support: Clean Drive page
Sun Service link
Use the Support: Sun Service Link page to find the URL for Sun Service.
User and service guide
85
Figure 70 Support: Sun Service Link page
86
Operating the Autoloader or Library
SL24 Operator control panel (OCP)
The operator control panel on the front of the device includes a 2‐line by 16‐character green backlit
liquid crystal display (LCD), four function keys, and four LEDs. This panel provides everything you
need to monitor the Autoloader’s status and control its functions.
The following functions are available through the OCP:
• “Unlocking the mailslot (Unlock Mailslot)” on page 92
• “Status/Information” on page 92
• “Inventory (Status/Information > Inventory)” on page 93
• “Autoloader information (Status/Information > Autoloader Information)” on page 94
• “Drive information (Status/Information > Drive Information)” on page 94
• “Component status (Status/Information > Component Status)” on page 95
• “Network information (Status/Information > Network Information)” on page 95
• “Configuration” on page 95
• “Configuring logical libraries (Status/Information > Set Logical Libraries)” on page 96
• “Changing the administrator password (Configuration > Change Admin
Password)” on page 96
• “Setting the number of reserved slots (Configuration > Set Reserved Slot Count)” on page 97
• “Configuring the mailslot (Configuration > Configure Mailslot)” on page 97
• “Bar code reporting format (Configuration > Barcode Format Reporting)” on page 97
• “Changing the SCSI address — parallel SCSI devices (Configuration > Change
Drive)” on page 98
• “Setting the master drive (Configuration > Set Master Drive)” on page 99
• “Setting behaviors (Configuration > Autoloader Behavior)” on page 99
• “Setting the date and time (Configuration > Autoloader Date/Time)” on page 100
• “Configuring network settings (Configuration > Configure Network Settings)” on page 101
• “Configuring automatic cleaning (Configuration > Configure Auto Cleaning)” on page 102
• “Restoring factory defaults (Configuration > Restore Defaults)” on page 102
• “Saving and restoring the Autoloader configuration (Configuration > Save/Restore
Configuration)” on page 103
• “Operations” on page 103
• “Unlocking, removing, and replacing magazines (Operations > Unlock Left or Right
Magazine)” on page 104
• “Cleaning a tape drive (Operations > Clean Drive)” on page 104
• “Moving tapes in the Autoloader (Operations > Move Tape)” on page 105
• “Updating tape cartridge inventory (Operations > Perform Inventory)” on page 106
• “Rebooting the Autoloader (Operations > Reboot Autoloader)” on page 106
• “Enabling password locks (Operations > Enable Autoldr Password Locks)” on page 107
• “Support” on page 107
• “Powering a drive on or off (Support > Power On/Off Drives)” on page 107
• “Running the demonstration (Support > Run Demo)” on page 107
• “Running the slot to slot test (Support > Run Slot To Slot Test)” on page 108
• “Running the wellness test (Support > Run Wellness Test)” on page 108
• “Upgrading firmware (Support > Autoloader FW Upgrade, Support > Drive FW
Upgrade)” on page 109
• “Forcing the drive to eject a tape (Support > Force Drive To Eject Tape)” on page 111
• “Viewing logs (Support > Autoloader Error Log)” on page 110
User and service guide
87
LED indicators
The operator panel includes four LEDs that provide a summary of the device status as detailed in
Figure 71.
1
2
3
4
11159
Figure 71 LEDs
1.
Green
Ready. Illuminated when power is on. Blinking during tape drive or robotics
activity.
2.
Amber
Clean. Illuminated when a cleaning cartridge should be used.
3.
Amber
Attention. Illuminated if the device has detected a condition that requires
attention.
4.
Amber
Error. Illuminated if an unrecoverable error occurs. A corresponding error
message displays on the LCD screen. You may need to cycle power on the
Autoloader to clear the Error LED.
Autoloader home screen
The first line of the Home screen displays the device’s product name. The second line displays a
brief status message.
Drive status definitions are listed in Table 16.
88
Operating the Autoloader or Library
Table 16 Drive status
Status
Definition
IDLE
Drive has a tape inserted, but there is no activity
RDY
Drive has no tape
RD
Drive is reading
FWD
Drive is forwarding
WR
Drive is writing
LD
Drive is loading a tape
ULD
Drive is unloading a tape
CLN
Drive is cleaning
RWD
Drive is rewinding
SEEK
Drive is seeking
ERS
Drive is erasing a tape
FORM
Drive is formatting a tape
CAL
Drive is calibrating
RMVD
Drive has been removed
OFF
Drive is disabled
No Drive
The drive is physically and logically not present.
Operator control panel buttons
The four operator control panel buttons, described in Figure 72, let you traverse the OCP menu
structure and enter information.
10763
Figure 72 Operator control panel buttons
Cancel
Cancels the current menu option, returns to the previous menu level, or returns to the
Home screen.
Enter
Enters the menu or selects the option displayed on the LCD screen.
Previous
Selects the previous item or value in the currently displayed menu.
Next
Selects the next item or value in the currently displayed menu.
Understanding the menu structure
The OCP options are organized under five menus: Unlock Mailslot, Status/Information, Configuration,
Operations, and Support.
User and service guide
89
NOTE:
The Unlock Mailslot menu is only displayed when the mailslot is enabled. To enable the mailslot, see
“Configuring the mailslot (Configuration > Configure Mailslot)” on page 97
From the Home screen, press Enter to bring up the first menu item. From a menu, use the Previous
and Next keys to cycle through the menus, press Enter to see the first option in the menu, or press
Cancel to return to the Home screen.
From an option, use the Previous and Next keys to cycle through the options in the menu, press Enter
to select the option, or press Cancel to return to the menu list.
The menu structure is shown in Figure 73.
90
Operating the Autoloader or Library
HOME
Unlock Mailslot
Status/Information
Configuration
Operations
Support
Inventory
Set Logical Libraries
Unlock Left Magazine
Power On/Off Drives
Autoloader Information
Change Admin
Password
Unlock Right Magazine
Run Demo
Drive 1 Information
Set Reserved
Slot Count
Clean Drive
Run Slot To Slot Test
Drive 2 Information
Configure Mailslot
Move Tape
Run Wellness Test
Component Status
Barcode Format
Reporting
Perform Inventory
Drive FW Upgrade
Network Information
Change Drive 1
Reboot Autoloader
Autoloader
FW Upgrade
Change Drive 2
SCSI ID
Enable Autoldr
Password Locks
Force Drive
To Eject Tape
Set Master Drive
Autoloader
Error Log
Autoloader Behavior
Autoloader
Warning Log
Autoloader Date/Time
Sun Service
Configure Network
Settings
Configure
Auto Cleaning
Restore Defaults
Requires Admin Password
Requires Service Password
(Sun Service personnel only)
Save/Restore
Configuration
11412
Figure 73 Autoloader menu tree
The administrator password accesses all of the available functionality, except for the Service Area. A
user without the administrator password has access to the Unlock Mailslot and Status/Information
menus.
Entering the administrator password
TIP:
By default, the administrator password is unset; all of the digits are null. You must set the
administrator password from the OCP to protect the administrator functions on the OCP and
enable the administrator functions in the RMI.
User and service guide
91
Options that require a password will prompt for a password before allowing access to the restricted
screens. Once entered, the administrator password does not need to be entered again unless there is
no user activity for five minutes or the password lock is enabled.
The number 1 should be flashing. To enter the password, do the following:
1.
From the operator control panel, press Next to scroll to the first number of the password.
2.
Press Enter. The number you selected is replaced with an asterisk (*), and the cursor proceeds
to the next text box.
3.
Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you have entered all eight numbers. After the last number has been
entered, the screen continues to the restricted area.
NOTE:
If you forget the administrator password, you cannot enter a new password. You must call your
customer service representative.
Unlocking the mailslot (Unlock Mailslot)
The mailslot in the left magazine is used only with host system software that supports this feature. The
mailslot feature allows you to insert or remove a single tape without removing the entire magazine.
The benefit of using a mailslot is that the Autoloader will not inventory the rest of the slots in the
magazine so the device can return to service sooner. The mailslot is in the left magazine.
NOTE:
The Unlock Mailslot menu is only displayed when the mailslot is enabled. To enable the mailslot,
see “Configuring the mailslot (Configuration > Configure Mailslot)” on page 97
To access the mailslot:
1.
From the Home screen, press Next until the screen displays Unlock Mailslot. Press Enter to select.
2.
The mailslot ejects automatically. Pull the mailslot out to access the tape (see Figure 74).
3.
The screen displays Close Mailslot.
4.
Remove the tape cartridge from the mailslot and insert a different tape cartridge.
5.
Push the magazine back into the Autoloader.
11345
Figure 74 Removing a tape from the mailslot
Status/Information
The Status/Information menu provides access to the following status options:
92
Operating the Autoloader or Library
•
•
•
•
•
“Inventory (Status/Information > Inventory)” on page 93
“Autoloader information (Status/Information > Autoloader Information)” on page 94
“Drive information (Status/Information > Drive Information)” on page 94
“Component status (Status/Information > Component Status)” on page 95
“Network information (Status/Information > Network Information)” on page 95
To access the Status/Information menu:
1.
From the Home screen, press Previous or Next until the screen displays Status/Information.
Press Enter to select.
2.
Press Previous or Next until the screen displays your selected function. Press Enter to select.
Inventory (Status/Information > Inventory)
This option provides information on which slots have cartridges and which are empty. The second
line on the screen displays one of:
• Full (tapes without bar code labels)
• Bar code identification from the tape
• Empty
The device has the following inventory locations:
• Mailslot
• Left magazine
• Right magazine
• Drive 1
• Drive 2 (if two drives are present)
Each location provides different information:
• Drive or Mailslot: The screen display may read Mailslot AESO32L3, where AESO32L3 is an
example of the bar code number on the tape, or it may read Full or Empty.
• Left or right magazine: The screen display may read Left Magazine or Right Magazine. The
second line on the display indicates which slots have a tape or are empty. Slots in the left
magazine are numbered 1‐12 or 1‐11, and slots in the right magazine are numbered 12‐23 or
13‐24. Each slot is represented by a character, as shown in Table 17.
Table 17 Display indication definitions
Character displayed
Definition
X
Slot has a tape
‐
Slot is empty
m
Mailslot is enabled but does not have a tape
M
Mailslot has a tape
C
Slot has a cleaning tape
!
Media needs attention, often as a result of a damaged or incompatible
cartridge
NOTE:
If the mailslot is enabled, the storage slot count is reduced.
To view more details about the contents of each slot, press Enter when the screen displays either
Left Magazine or Right Magazine.
To view the tape inventory:
User and service guide
93
1.
From the Home screen, press Previous or Next until the screen displays Status/Information.
Press Enter to select.
2.
Press Previous or Next until the screen displays Inventory. Press Enter to select.
3.
By using Previous or Next, you can select from the following inventory locations:
4.
• Mailslot — SL24 Autoloader
• Left magazine — includes the mailslot
• Left magazine — SL24 Autoloader
• Right magazine
• Drive 1
• Drive 2 (if two drives are present)
To view the inventory of a magazine, press Enter when the OCP displays Left or Right Magazine.
The OCP will display the contents of the lowest numbered slot in the magazine. The display will
show the tape bar code number, Full, or Empty.
5.
Use Previous or Next to scroll through the remaining slots in the magazine. Press Cancel to
choose another inventory location.
6.
To view the inventory of a tape drive, press Previous or Next until the screen displays Drive,
Drive 1, or Drive 2. The display will show the tape bar code number, Full, or Empty. Press Enter
to view the source of the tape loaded in the drive. For example, Drive 1 Tape Source = Slot 2,
indicates that the tape in Drive 1 was loaded from slot 2.
Autoloader information (Status/Information > Autoloader Information)
To obtain information about your Autoloader:
1.
From the Home screen press Previous or Next until the screen displays Status/Information.
Press Enter to select.
2.
Press Previous or Next until the screen displays Autoloader Information. Press Enter to select.
By using Previous or Next, you can select from the following information screens:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Autoloader Time
Firmware rev.
Product ID
Serial number
SCSI ID and LUN (SCSI devices only)
Slots and Mailslots
Master drive
Odometer
Power On Time
WWide Node Name for the FC node to which the Autoloader is connected. (Fibre Channel
devices only)
Drive information (Status/Information > Drive Information)
To obtain drive information:
1.
From the Home screen, press Previous or Next until the screen displays Status/Information.
Press Enter to select.
2.
Press Previous or Next until the screen displays Drive 1 Information or Drive 2 Information.
Press Enter to select.
94
Operating the Autoloader or Library
3.
By using Previous or Next, you can select from the following information screens:
•
•
•
•
Serial number
Drive type
Firmware revision
SCSI ID (parallel SCSI tape drives only)
For a Fibre Channel tape drive, you can also select from the following information screens:
• The WWide Node Name for the FC node to which the tape drive is connected.
• The WWide Port Name and Port Type for Port A.
• The WWide Port Name and Port Type for Port B.
World Wide names are assigned automatically; they cannot be configured.
Component status (Status/Information > Component Status)
To obtain component status:
1.
From the Home screen, press Previous or Next until the screen displays Status/Information.
Press Enter to select.
2.
Press Previous or Next until the screen displays Component Status. Press Enter to select.
3.
By using Previous or Next, you can select from the following information screens:
•
•
•
•
Drive activity
Autoloader status
Drives status
Fan status
The second line of the screen will display one of the following:
• Good — the component is operating normally.
• Warning — the component might have an issue that should be addressed. The device
is functional.
• Critical — the component has an error condition that should be addressed. The device
may not be fully functional.
• Failed — the component has a known failure and should be replaced.
Network information (Status/Information > Network Information)
To access network settings for the device:
1.
From the Home screen, press Previous or Next until the screen displays Status/Information.
Press Enter to select.
2.
Press Previous or Next until the screen displays Network Information. Press Enter to select.
3.
Press Previous or Next to access the following information:
4.
• IPv4 Network Enabled or Disabled
• IPv6 Network Enabled or Disabled
• Host Name
• Domain Name
• MAC Address
For IPv4 Network or IPv6 Network, press Enter and then use Previous or Next to access the
network addresses and configuration.
Configuration
The Configuration menu provides access to the following configuration functions:
User and service guide
95
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
“Configuring logical libraries (Status/Information > Set Logical Libraries)” on page 96
“Changing the administrator password (Configuration > Change Admin Password)” on page 96
“Setting the number of reserved slots (Configuration > Set Reserved Slot Count)” on page 97
“Configuring the mailslot (Configuration > Configure Mailslot)” on page 97
“Bar code reporting format (Configuration > Barcode Format Reporting)” on page 97
“Changing the SCSI address — parallel SCSI devices (Configuration > Change
Drive)” on page 98
“Changing the drive configuration — Fibre Channel devices (Configuration > Change
Drive)” on page 98
“Setting the master drive (Configuration > Set Master Drive)” on page 99
“Setting behaviors (Configuration > Autoloader Behavior)” on page 99
“Setting the date and time (Configuration > Autoloader Date/Time)” on page 100
“Configuring network settings (Configuration > Configure Network Settings)” on page 101
“Configuring automatic cleaning (Configuration > Configure Auto Cleaning)” on page 102
“Restoring factory defaults (Configuration > Restore Defaults)” on page 102
“Saving and restoring the Autoloader configuration (Configuration > Save/Restore
Configuration)” on page 103
To access the Configuration menu:
1.
From the Home screen, press Previous or Next until the screen displays Configuration. Press
Enter to select.
2.
Press Previous or Next until the screen displays your selected function. Press Enter to select.
Configuring logical libraries (Status/Information > Set Logical Libraries)
Use Set Logical Libraries to configure a two‐drive Tape Autoloader into one or two logical libraries.
Access to this feature requires the administrator password. For more information about logical
libraries, see “Logical libraries” on page 22.
To change the administrator password:
1.
From the Home screen, press Previous or Next until the screen displays Configuration. Press
Enter to select.
2.
Press Previous or Next until the screen displays Set Logical Libraries. Press Enter to select.
3.
Enter the administrator password if prompted.
4.
Press Previous or Next to scroll through the display until the desired number of logical libraries is
displayed, then press Enter.
Changing the administrator password (Configuration > Change Admin Password)
Use Change Admin Password to set or change the administrator password. Once the administrator
password is set, you must know the administrator password or the service password to change
the administrator password. Passwords consist of exactly eight numbers each between the values
of 0 and 9.
Screens that require a password prompt for the password before allowing access to the restricted areas.
Once entered, the administrator password does not have to be entered a second time unless there is no
user activity for five minutes. Enter the administrator password if you are prompted to do so.
To change the administrator password:
1.
From the Home screen, press Previous or Next until the screen displays Configuration. Press
Enter to select.
2.
Press Previous or Next until the screen displays Change Admin Password. Press Enter to select.
3.
The first number is flashing. Press Previous or Next to change the value of the flashing number.
When the flashing number shows the desired value, press Enter to select.
96
Operating the Autoloader or Library
4.
The screen displays the second number flashing. Repeat Step 3 until you have entered all eight
characters. Press Enter to select. After the last number has been entered, the password has been
set to the new password.
NOTE:
If you forget the administrator password, you cannot enter a new password. You must call your
customer service representative.
Setting the number of reserved slots (Configuration > Set Reserved Slot Count)
Reserved slots can be accessed by the remote management interface (RMI) and the operator control
panel (OCP), but are invisible to the host and backup software. For example, you might keep a
cleaning cartridge in a reserved slot if your backup software does not manage the cleaning process.
On the SL24 Tape Autoloader, you can reserve up to 22 slots. Access to this feature requires the
administrator password.
To set the reserved slot count:
1.
From the Home screen, press Previous or Next until the screen displays Configuration. Press
Enter to select.
2.
Press Previous or Next until the screen displays Set Reserved Slot Count. Press Enter to select.
3.
Enter the administrator password if prompted.
4.
Press Previous or Next to scroll through the display until the desired number of slots is displayed,
then press Enter.
Configuring the mailslot (Configuration > Configure Mailslot)
The mailslot is a single slot at the front of the left magazine that you can access without removing the
whole magazine. Loading a tape through the mailslot is faster than opening the magazine because
the device does not need to inventory the rest of the magazine slots when you use the mailslot.
Also, the device can continue to function when the mailslot is open. Access to this feature requires
the administrator password.
To enable or disable the mailslot:
1.
From the Home screen, press Previous or Next until the screen displays Configuration. Press
Enter to select.
2.
Press Previous or Next until the screen displays Configure Mailslot. Press Enter to select.
3.
Enter the administrator password if prompted.
4.
The screen displays either Mailslot Enabled or Mailslot Disabled.
5.
Press Previous or Next until the screen displays Disable Mailslot? or Enable Mailslot?. Press
Enter when the correct action is displayed.
Bar code reporting format (Configuration > Barcode Format Reporting)
You can configure how the tape bar code is displayed in the OCP and RMI, and how it is reported
to the host software. You can configure the number of characters to display and the whether the
numbers should be justified to the left or right. For example, when reporting only six characters of
the bar code label 12345678, if alignment is left, the Autoloader will report 123456. If alignment is
right, the Autoloader will report 345678. The default configuration is 8 Left. Access to this feature
requires the administrator password.
To configure the bar code report format:
1.
From the Home screen, press Previous or Next until the screen displays Configuration. Press
Enter to select.
User and service guide
97
2.
Press Previous or Next until the screen displays Barcode Format Reporting. Press Enter to select.
3.
Press Previous or Next until the screen displays either Display Format or Host Format. The
second line displays the number of characters and the current format. To change the current
format, press Enter to select either Display or Host. An example of the screen display is #
of characters 8.
4.
Press Previous or Next until the desired number of characters is listed. Press Enter to select.
5.
The screen displays either Alignment Left or Alignment Right. Use Previous or Next to toggle
between the two choices. Press Enter to select the correct alignment.
Changing the SCSI address — parallel SCSI devices (Configuration > Change Drive)
CAUTION:
If you change the SCSI ID, you might need to cycle power on the host server and reconfigure your
backup software before you can use the device.
This option changes the SCSI address of a tape drive. The tape drive’s logical unit number (LUN) will
always be LUN 0 on the SCSI address. The Autoloader’s SCSI address will be the same as the master
drive, but will use LUN 1. Access to this feature requires the administrator password.
To change the drive SCSI address:
1.
From the Home screen, press Previous or Next until the screen displays Configuration. Press
Enter to select.
2.
Press Previous or Next until the screen displays Change Drive, Change Drive 1 or Change
Drive 2. Press Enter to select.
3.
Enter the administrator password if prompted.
4.
The screen displays the current SCSI ID. Press Previous or Next to change the SCSI ID number.
Press Enter to select. An example of the screen display is Drive 1 SCSI ID 6.
Changing the drive configuration — Fibre Channel devices (Configuration > Change
Drive)
This option allows you to configure the FC ports for your tape drive.
Each drive has two ports, A and B.
NOTE:
Sun recommends that you cable Port A only and that you configure Port B for Auto Detect on
Fibre Speed and Port Type.
To configure the FC settings:
1.
From the Home screen, press Previous or Next until the screen displays Configuration. Press
Enter to select.
2.
Press Previous or Next until the screen displays Change Drive 1. Press Enter to select.
3.
Enter the administrator password if prompted.
4.
The screen displays Port A. Press Enter to select and display Fibre Speed.
5.
Press Enter to display Set Fibre Speed. Press Previous or Next to toggle through the speed
settings (Auto Detect, 1 Gb/s, 2 Gb/s, or 4 Gb/s). Press Enter to select the required speed.
6.
The screen displays Port Type. Press Enter to display Set Port Type. Press Previous or Next to
toggle through the port types (Fabric (N), Loop (NL), or Auto Detect). Press Enter to select
the required port type.
98
Operating the Autoloader or Library
7.
If you selected Fabric (N) or Auto Detect, configuration is now complete; go to step 9. If you
selected Loop (NL), Set Port Loop Mode is displayed. Press Previous or Next to toggle through
the loop modes (Soft, Hard, or Hard Auto Select). Press Enter to select the required loop mode.
8.
If you selected Soft or Hard Auto Select, configuration is now complete; go to step 9. If you
selected Hard, Set ALPA is displayed with the first number flashing. Press Previous or Next until
the flashing number reads correctly. Press Enter to move to the next number. Repeat this step
until all numbers in the address are correct. Press Enter.
9.
Press Enter to save the settings and reset the port.
10. The screen displays Port B.
11. Press Enter to select and display Fibre Speed. Select Auto Detect. Press Enter.
12. Press Enter to select and display Port Type. Select Auto Detect. Press Enter.
Setting the master drive (Configuration > Set Master Drive)
CAUTION:
If you change the SCSI ID, you might need to cycle power on the host server and reconfigure your
backup software before you can use the Autoloader.
To set the master drive:
1.
From the Home screen, press Previous or Next until the screen displays Configuration. Press
Enter to select.
2.
Press Previous or Next until the screen displays Set Master Drive. Press Enter to select.
3.
Enter the administrator password if prompted.
4.
Press Previous or Next until the screen displays either Master Drive Drive 1 or Master Drive
Drive 2.
5.
Press Enter to select the displayed configuration. The screen displays either Drive 1 Set to
Master, or Drive 2 Set to Master, and the Ready LED blinks.
Setting behaviors (Configuration > Autoloader Behavior)
The Autoloader supports three behavior modes: Random, Sequential, and Automatic. The Autoloader
automatically detects the required mode from the series of SCSI commands it receives; however, you
can also change the mode. Choose the operating mode based on the capabilities of the software
controlling the tape cartridges. The Library mode can be set independently for each logical library.
Access to this feature requires the administrator password.
Random mode: In Random mode, the device does not automatically load tapes into the tape drive; it
waits for commands from the software or operator to load and unload tapes. Random mode is used
with a full featured or a robotics‐aware backup application and is the most common mode of operation.
Your backup software must support robotics, which may require an additional software module.
Sequential mode: In Sequential mode, the device automatically loads and unloads tapes from the
drive. Sequential mode is used when the backup software is NOT robotics‐aware or was designed
for standalone drives only.
In Sequential mode, the Autoloader will only use the lowest‐numbered tape drive.
The operator begins the sequence by loading the desired tape into the tape drive. When a tape is
unloaded for any reason, the device automatically removes the tape from the drive, returns it to its
original slot, then loads the tape from the next available higher numbered slot.
To further determine how you want tapes loaded into the tape drive while in Sequential mode, you
can set the Loop and Autoload options.
• When Autoload mode is set, the device automatically loads the cartridge from the lowest‐numbered
full slot into the tape drive. It then follows standard sequential operation.
User and service guide
99
• When Loop mode is on, the original first cartridge in the sequence is reloaded after the device
has cycled through all available cartridges. If Loop mode is off and the last cartridge has been
unloaded, the device stops loading cartridges until you load another manually.
CAUTION:
Use caution when choosing Loop mode because it makes it possible to overwrite data on
previously written cartridges.
When an Autoloader is partitioned into logical libraries, each logical library operates as an
independent library. Thus, the Autoloader only loads tapes from the slots associated with one
logical library into the tape drive associated with that logical library; it will not load tapes from slots
associated with another logical library.
Automatic mode: In Automatic mode, the device switches from Sequential mode into Random mode
when it receives certain SCSI commands. Automatic mode is the default setting.
To set a behavior mode:
1.
From the Home screen, press Previous or Next until the screen displays Configuration. Press
Enter to select.
2.
Press Previous or Next until the screen displays Autoloader Behavior. Press Enter to select.
3.
Enter the administrator password if prompted.
4.
Press Previous or Next until the screen displays Autoloader Mode. Press Enter.
5.
The screen displays Set Autoloader Mode, followed by the current Autoloader mode: Automatic,
Sequential, or Random. To change the mode, press Enter.
6.
Press Previous or Next to scroll through the screens for Automatic, Sequential, or Random.
Press Enter to select the Autoloader mode.
7.
If you enabled Sequential mode, you can configure the Autoload and Loop options:
a.
Press Previous or Next until the screen displays Autoload Mode Disable or Autoload Mode
Enable. To change the Autoload mode, press Enter. The screen displays either Disable
Autoload Mode or Enable Autoload Mode. Press Previous or Next to toggle between the
enabled and disabled screens. Press Enter to select the Autoload mode. The display shows
the new Autoload mode.
b.
Press Previous or Next until the screen displays either Loop Mode Disable or Loop Mode
Enable. To change loop mode, press Enter. The screen displays either Enable Loop Mode or
Disable Loop Mode. Press Previous or Next to toggle between the enabled and disabled
screens. Press Enter to select the loop mode.
Setting the date and time (Configuration > Autoloader Date/Time)
NOTE:
When setting the hours, the time is based on a 24‐hour clock. There is no a.m. or p.m. designation.
Use Set Date and Time to set the date and time used to record events. Access to this feature requires
the administrator password.
To set the date:
1.
From the Home screen, press Previous or Next until the screen displays Configuration. Press
Enter to select.
2.
Press Previous or Next until the screen displays Autoloader Date/Time. Press Enter to select.
3.
Enter the administrator password if prompted.
100
Operating the Autoloader or Library
4.
The screen displays Set Yr/Month/Day 2006 / 07 / 21 with a flashing number. Press Previous or
Next to change the value of the flashing number. Press Enter to accept the value of the flashing
number and move to the next number.
5.
Repeat Step 5 until all numbers in the date are correct. Press Enter.
6.
The screen displays (example) Set Hour / Mins 16 : 52 with the first number flashing. Press
Previous or Next until the flashing number reads correctly. Press Enter to move to the next
number. Repeat this step until all numbers in the time are correct. Press Enter.
Configuring network settings (Configuration > Configure Network Settings)
The device can automatically obtain an IP address from a DHCP server when the device is powered
on. The device also supports user‐specified fixed addresses through the front panel.
The device also supports SNMP. You can enable SNMP and configure the target addresses with the
RMI. See “Changing the network configuration” on page 73.
To configure IPv4 network settings:
1.
From the Home screen, press Previous or Next until the screen displays Configuration. Press
Enter to select.
2.
Press Previous or Next until the screen displays Configure Network Settings. Press Enter to
select.
3.
Press Previous or Next until the screen displays IPv4 Networking Enabled. Press Enter to select.
4.
Press Previous or Next until the screen displays DHCP Enabled. To change the setting, press
Enter. Press Next until the screen shows the desired setting. Press Enter to accept the new setting.
5.
If DHCP is disabled, press Previous or Next until the screen displays IP Address. The second
line displays the current IP address.
6.
To change the IP address, press Enter. The screen displays Set IP Address with the first number
flashing. Press Previous or Next to change the flashing number to the correct value.
7.
Press Enter to select the next number, until all numbers have been set. The screen displays New
IP Address.
8.
Press Previous or Next until the screen displays Subnet Mask Address. To change the Subnet
Mask Address, press Enter. The screen displays Set Subnet Mask Address, with the first
number flashing.
9.
Press Previous or Next to change the flashing number to the correct value. Press Enter to select
the next number.
10. Repeat Step 9 until all numbers have been set. The screen displays New Subnet Address.
11. Press Previous or Next until the screen displays Gateway Address. To change the Gateway
Address, press Enter. The screen displays Set Gateway Addr, with the first number flashing.
12. Press Previous or Next to change the flashing number to the correct value. Press Enter to select
the next number.
13. Repeat Step 12 until all numbers have been set. The screen displays New Gateway Addr. Press
Enter.
To enable IPv6:
1.
From the Home screen, press Previous or Next until the screen displays Configuration. Press
Enter to select.
2.
Press Previous or Next until the screen displays Configure Network Settings. Press Enter to
select.
3.
Press Previous or Next until the screen displays IPv6 Networking. Press Enter to select.
4.
The screen displays IPv6 Network Addressing Disabled. To change the setting, press Enter.
5.
Press Next until the screen displays the desired setting. Press Enter to accept the new setting.
User and service guide
101
6.
Configure IPv6 networking from the RMI. See “Changing the network configuration” on page 73.
Configuring automatic cleaning (Configuration > Configure Auto Cleaning)
When auto clean is enabled, the device automatically loads a cleaning cartridge when a tape drive
needs to be cleaned. The device identifies a tape cartridge as a cleaning cartridge if it has a barcode
label that starts with CLN or after an unlabeled cleaning tape has been loaded into the tape drive.
The Autoloader can use a cleaning cartridge from any slot, even if the slot is reserved. The Autoloader
keeps track of the usage count for each of the cleaning cartridges. When multiple cleaning cartridges
are available, the Autoloader will first choose an unknown cleaning cartridge so the Autoloader can
start tracking the cartridge’s usage count. If the Autoloader knows the usage count for all of the
cleaning cartridges, the Autoloader will choose the one with the highest usage count.
Auto cleaning is disabled by default. You can enable automatic cleaning even if there are no cleaning
cartridges in the device. In this case, the device will display a warning message.
CAUTION:
Only enable automatic cleaning in either the backup application or the Autoloader, not both.
To configure automatic cleaning:
1.
From the Home screen, press Previous or Next until the screen displays Configuration. Press
Enter to select.
2.
Press Previous or Next until the screen displays Configure Auto Cleaning. Press Enter to select.
3.
The screen displays Auto Cleaning Disabled or Auto Cleaning Enabled depending on the
current setting. To change the auto cleaning configuration, press Enter.
4.
Press Previous or Next until the screen displays the configuration you want. Press Enter.
Restoring factory defaults (Configuration > Restore Defaults)
The device can reset most of the configurations to the factory defaults, while retaining the settings
necessary to use the RMI. The device will perform an inventory after the defaults are restored.
The restored settings are:
• SCSI addresses: The SCSI ID for the bottom drive is 4; the SCSI ID for the top drive is 5. The
Autoloader will no longer recall a drive that has been removed.
• Fibre Channel drive configuration: Automatic speed, auto port type
• Master drive: reset to Drive 1 or the lowest numbered existing drive
• Drive power: all drives powered on
• Active slots: maximum possible
• Autoloader mode: Automatic
• Loop: No
• Event log levels and filter: continuous trace and all levels and filters active (for Service use only)
• Barcode reader label length: 8
• Barcode reader alignment: Left
• Error recovery: On
• Mailslot configuration: mailslot disabled
• Auto clean: disabled
• SNMP: disabled, but saved addresses to not change
• E‐mail notification: disabled, but configurations retained
The following settings are not reset:
• Administrator password
• Network settings (network is always enabled)
102
Operating the Autoloader or Library
• Date and time
To restore the factory defaults:
1.
From the Home screen, press Previous or Next until the screen displays Configuration. Press
Enter to select.
2.
Press Previous or Next until the screen displays Restore Defaults. Press Enter to select.
Saving and restoring the Autoloader configuration (Configuration > Save/Restore
Configuration)
Use this option to save the Autoloader configuration database to a USB flash drive. The saved
configuration database will make it easier to recover the Autoloader configuration if you need to
replace the chassis or library controller.
This feature is also useful when installing multiple devices. Either save the configuration before
configuring the network or ensure that only one device with the same network configuration is on
the network at a time until they have unique network identities.
To save the Autoloader configuration to a USB flash drive:
1.
Insert the USB flash drive in the USB port on the back of the Autoloader.
2.
From the Home screen, press Previous or Next until the screen displays Configuration. Press
Enter to select.
3.
Press Previous or Next until the screen displays Save/Restore Configuration. Press Enter to
select.
4.
Enter the administrator password if prompted.
5.
The screen displays Save Configuration to USB. Press Enter to save.
6.
When the save operation is completed, remove the USB flash drive from the USB port.
To restore the Autoloader configuration from a USB flash drive:
1.
Insert the USB flash drive in the USB port on the back of the Autoloader.
2.
From the Home screen, press Previous or Next until the screen displays Configuration. Press
Enter to select.
3.
Press Previous or Next until the screen displays Save/Restore Configuration. Press Enter to
select.
4.
Enter the administrator password if prompted.
5.
Press Previous or Next until the screen displays Restore Config from USB. Press Enter.
6.
Press Previous or Next until the screen displays the filename of the Autoloader firmware file on
the USB drive. Press Enter to select the firmware file.
7.
When the restore operation is completed, remove the USB flash drive from the USB port.
NOTE:
You can save the Autoloader configuration to a file from the RMI. See “Saving and restoring the
Autoloader or Library configuration and restoring factory defaults” on page 78
Operations
The Operations menu provides access to the following options:
• “Unlocking, removing, and replacing magazines (Operations > Unlock Left or Right
Magazine)” on page 104
• “Cleaning a tape drive (Operations > Clean Drive)” on page 104
User and service guide
103
•
•
•
•
“Moving tapes in the Autoloader (Operations > Move Tape)” on page 105
“Updating tape cartridge inventory (Operations > Perform Inventory)” on page 106
“Rebooting the Autoloader (Operations > Reboot Autoloader)” on page 106
“Enabling password locks (Operations > Enable Autoldr Password Locks)” on page 107
To access the Operations menu:
1.
From the Home screen, press Previous or Next until the screen displays Operations. Press
Enter to select.
2.
Press Previous or Next until the screen displays your selected function. Press Enter to select.
Unlocking, removing, and replacing magazines (Operations > Unlock Left or Right
Magazine)
These OCP options let you gain access to the left and right magazine. Access to the magazines requires
the use of the administrator password.
To remove a magazine:
1.
From the Home screen, press Previous or Next on the OCP until the screen displays Operations.
2.
Press Enter to select.
3.
Press Previous or Next until the screen displays either Unlock Left Magazine or Unlock Right
Magazine.
4.
Press Enter to select the desired magazine to unlock.
5.
Enter the administrator password if requested.
6.
The display reads Left Magazine Unlocked or Right Magazine Unlocked.
7.
Pull the released magazine out of the device.
8.
The screen now displays Insert Left Magazine or Insert Right Magazine. The device cannot
perform any other operation until the magazine is replaced. After exchanging tapes in a
magazine, slide the magazine completely into the device. The magazine locks into place once it
is correctly installed and the device inventories the magazine. The Ready LED blinks while the
device inventories the magazine and then stops when the operation is complete.
Cleaning a tape drive (Operations > Clean Drive)
When the Clean LED is on, a tape drive needs to be cleaned. Cleaning times can range from a few
seconds to a few minutes during which time the Ready LED blinks. Use only the designated cleaning
cartridge for your tape drive model. To order data and cleaning cartridges, please use the contact
information below to locate the nearest Sun tape media reseller:
In the US contact 1‐877‐STK‐TAPE
In EAME contact 33 (0) 1 69 038341
nl
nl
Use only Ultrium Universal cleaning cartridges.
IMPORTANT:
If the cleaning cartridge is not a valid cleaning cartridge, the LCD screen displays Invalid Tape
and the cartridge is returned to its original location.
IMPORTANT:
If the Clean LED or the Attention LED (on load or unload) lights when inserting the same
cartridge after you have cleaned the drive, there may be a problem with that cartridge.
104
Operating the Autoloader or Library
If you use the operator control panel to clean the tape drive, load the cleaning cartridge into the
mailslot or any other empty slot before beginning the cleaning steps. If you would like to keep
a cleaning cartridge in the device, the backup software must manage tape drive cleaning or be
configured to bypass the slot containing the cleaning cartridge.
To clean the tape drive:
1.
Make sure a cleaning cartridge is in the mailslot or one of the magazines.
2.
From the Home Screen, press Previous or Next until the screen displays Operations. Press
Enter to select.
3.
Press Previous or Next until the screen displays Clean Drive. Press Enter to select.
4.
Use Previous or Next until the screen displays Drive 1 or Drive 2. The second line can display
either Clean Required or Good for both drives. Select the drive for Clean Required.
5.
When the screen displays the correct drive, press Enter. The screen displays either Cleaning
Tape Slot 4 or Cleaning Tape Slot XX, where XX represents flashing blocks. If a slot number
is displayed, the tape in that slot has a bar code label identifying the tape as a cleaning tape. If
a slot number is displayed, continue to Step 6. If no slot number is displayed, it indicates that
the device is not able to detect that a cleaning tape with a bar code is in the device. In this case,
the operator must select the slot where a cleaning tape resides.
6.
Use Previous or Next to display the location of a cleaning tape.
7.
When the correct location for the cleaning tape is displayed, press Enter to select. While the
device cleans the drive, Cleaning Drive 1 in progress or Cleaning Drive 2 in progress it displays.
8.
After the cleaning cycle is complete, the screen displays either Cleaning Drive 1 Complete, or
Cleaning Drive 1 Failed. If the cleaning cycle failed, press Enter to display the error code and
message explaining the failure.
The device returns the cleaning cartridge to the original slot. If you loaded the cartridge from the front
panel, you should now unload it either by using the mailslot, or by removing the magazine. When the
tape drive cleaning cycle is complete, the Clean LED turns off (if previously on).
Moving tapes in the Autoloader (Operations > Move Tape)
Use this option to move a cartridge from a tape drive, a tape slot in any magazine or the mailslot to any
other location not already holding a tape. You can also load and unload tape cartridges to and from
the installed tape drives. You must first select where you want to move the tape from and then indicate
where you want to move the tape to. Access to this command requires the administrator password.
To move a tape:
1.
From the Home screen, press Previous or Next until the screen displays Operations. Press
Enter to select.
2.
Press Previous or Next until the screen displays Move Tape. Press Enter to select.
3.
Enter the administrator password if prompted. Use Previous or Next to select from the possible
sources:
4.
5.
• Mailslot
• Right Magazine
• Left Magazine
• Drive 1
• Drive 2 (if two drives are present)
When the correct source is displayed, press Enter to select.
If the source selected is a magazine, use Previous or Next to select the slot. Only slots with tapes
are listed. The second line displays the bar code for the tape or reads Full.
User and service guide
105
6.
Once the correct slot is displayed, press Enter to select.
You have now selected the tape you would like to move. The screen now requests the destination
for this tape.
7.
Use Previous or Next to select from the possible destinations as follows:
8.
• Mailslot
• Right Magazine
• Left Magazine
• Drive 1
• Drive 2 (if two drives are present)
When the correct destination is displayed, press Enter to select.
9.
If the destination selected is a magazine, use Previous or Next to display the slot. Only empty
slots are listed.
Once the correct slot is displayed, press Enter to select. The device now moves the tape from the
selected source, to the selected destination. While the device moves the tape, the screen displays
Moving Tape. Once the tape has been moved, the screen displays either Move Complete, or Move
Failed. If the move failed, press Enter to display the error code and message explaining the failure.
Updating tape cartridge inventory (Operations > Perform Inventory)
This option updates the device’s tape cartridge inventory. The device checks each slot and drive to
determine which tape, if any, is present.
To update the tape cartridge inventory:
1.
From the Home screen, press Previous or Next until the screen displays Operations. Press
Enter to select.
2.
Press Previous or Next until the screen displays Perform Inventory. Press Enter to select.
3.
While the inventory is in progress, the screen displays Inventory in Progress...
4.
The Autoloader now checks the drive and each slot for the presence of a tape to update the
inventory information. The Ready LED blinks during this operation.
NOTE:
This command is only needed if the inventory in the device is different than the inventory
displayed on the front panel, which would not happen under normal conditions.
Rebooting the Autoloader (Operations > Reboot Autoloader)
This option reboots the device and forces a new cartridge inventory, clearing any current error
condition.
CAUTION:
This option interrupts the current backup or restore operation and causes the operation to fail.
Use this option if the device is in an error state.
To reboot:
1.
From the Home screen, press Previous or Next until the screen displays Operations. Press
Enter to select.
2.
Press Previous or Next until the screen displays Reboot Autoloader. Press Enter to select.
3.
The Ready LED blinks during the reboot operation.
106
Operating the Autoloader or Library
Enabling password locks (Operations > Enable Autoldr Password Locks)
This option locks the restricted areas. This is typically used if you do not want to wait for the time out
to reset the locks. Power cycling or rebooting the device also resets the locks.
To enable the password locks:
1.
From the Home screen, press Previous or Next until the screen displays Operations. Press
Enter to select.
2.
Press Previous or Next until the screen displays Enable Autoldr Password Locks. Press Enter to
select.
Support
The Support menu provides access to the following support options:
• “Powering a drive on or off (Support > Power On/Off Drives)” on page 107
• “Running the demonstration (Support > Run Demo)” on page 107
• “Running the slot to slot test (Support > Run Slot To Slot Test)” on page 108
• “Running the wellness test (Support > Run Wellness Test)” on page 108
• “Upgrading firmware (Support > Autoloader FW Upgrade, Support > Drive FW
Upgrade)” on page 109
• “Viewing logs (Support > Autoloader Error Log)” on page 110
• “Forcing the drive to eject a tape (Support > Force Drive To Eject Tape)” on page 111
To access the Support menu:
1.
From the Home screen, press Previous or Next until the screen displays Support. Press Enter to
select.
2.
Press Previous or Next until the screen displays your selected function. Press Enter to select.
Powering a drive on or off (Support > Power On/Off Drives)
Use this option to power a drive on or off without interrupting power to the rest of the device and the
second drive. This is typically used when replacing one drive in a two‐drive configuration. Access to
this feature requires the administrator password.
To power on or off the drive or drives:
1.
From the Home screen, press Previous or Next until the screen displays Support. Press Enter to
select.
2.
Press Previous or Next until the screen displays Power On/Off Drives. Press Enter to select.
3.
Enter the administrator password, if prompted.
4.
Press Previous or Next until the screen displays the drive you need to power on or off. The
screen displays Drive or Drive 1. The second line in the display displays the current state, which
is either Power ON or Power OFF.
5.
To change the power status, press Enter. The screen displays either Press Enter to Power off
Drive or DRV1, or Press Enter to Power on Drive or DRV1. Press Enter to select. The Ready
LED blinks during the operations.
Running the demonstration (Support > Run Demo)
Use this option to run a device demonstration program. The demonstration continues until the Cancel
button is pressed on the operator control panel. During the demonstration the device will move
cartridges to the tape drive and back. At the end of the demonstration the cartridges are returned to
their original slots. Access to this feature requires the administrator password.
To run the demonstration:
User and service guide
107
1.
From the Home screen, press Previous or Next until the screen displays Support. Press Enter to
select.
2.
Press Previous or Next until the screen displays Run Demo. Press Enter to select.
3.
Enter the administrator password if prompted.
4.
Use Previous and Next to select the number of cycles: 270, 540, 1080, or Endless. Press Enter
to start the demonstration.
5.
While the test is running, the first line of the screen displays Demo Test. The second line displays
the number of cycles completed and the number of errors. The Ready LED blinks until the
test is complete.
NOTE:
To stop the demonstration, press Cancel on the operator control panel.
Running the slot to slot test (Support > Run Slot To Slot Test)
Use this option to show the robot’s ability to move media in and out of each of the magazine slots.
Access to this feature requires the administrator password.
NOTE:
At the end of the test, the cartridges are NOT returned to their original slots.
To run the slot to slot test:
1.
From the Home screen, press Previous or Next until the screen displays Support. Press Enter to
select.
2.
Press Previous or Next until the screen displays Run Slot To Slot Test. Press Enter to select.
3.
Enter the administrator password, if prompted.
4.
Press Previous or Next until the screen displays Select Number of Cycles. Use Previous or Next
to select the number of cycles: 270, 540, 1080, or Endless. Press Enter.
5.
While the test is running, the screen displays progress as shown: Run Slot To Slot. The second
line on the display shows the number of cycles completed. The Ready LED blinks until the
test is complete.
6.
When the test is complete, the screen displays the number of cycles completed and the number of
errors. If the test failed, press Enter to display the error and message describing the cause.
NOTE:
To stop the slot to slot test, press the Cancel button.
Running the wellness test (Support > Run Wellness Test)
Use this option to check the health of the device for the specified number of loops. If a failure
occurs during the test, check the error code and failure message for more information. Access to this
feature requires the administrator password. For more information about the wellness test, see “The
wellness test” on page 151.
For complete testing, enable the mailslot and ensure that each top‐row corner slot contains a tape
cartridge. During the test, the device will open the mailslot and ask you to insert a tape cartridge. You
can use any compatible Ultrium data tape cartridge for this test.
108
Operating the Autoloader or Library
IMPORTANT:
The Autoloader will remove any tape cartridges from tape drives and go offline when running
the wellness test. Verify that any applications using the Autoloader have completed before
starting the wellness test.
To run the wellness test:
1.
From the Home screen, press Previous or Next until the screen displays Support. Press Enter to
select.
2.
Press Previous or Next until the screen displays Run Wellness Test. Press Enter to select.
3.
Enter the administrator password, if prompted.
4.
On a device with two tape drives, press Previous or Next to select the tape drive to test: Drive 1,
Drive 2, or All Drives. Press Enter to select the drive option.
5.
Use Previous or Next to select a number of cycles: 1 ‐ 10. Press Enter.
6.
While the test is running, the screen displays progress as shown: Wellness test. The second line
on the display shows the number of cycles completed. The Ready LED blinks until the test is
complete.
7.
When the test is complete, the screen displays the test completion status, including any recoveries
or errors that may have occurred. See “Error codes” on page 153 for a list of error codes and
error messages.
NOTE:
To stop the wellness test, press the Cancel button.
Upgrading firmware (Support > Autoloader FW Upgrade, Support > Drive FW Upgrade)
The Autoloader allows two types of firmware to be upgraded — one for the tape drive and the other
for the Autoloader itself. You can upgrade both types of firmware from a USB flash drive. You can
also upgrade the tape drive firmware from a firmware upgrade tape. Access to this feature requires
the administrator password.
To upgrade Autoloader firmware from a USB flash drive:
1.
Download current Autoloader firmware from the Sun SunSolve website: http://sunsolve.sun.com.
Copy the firmware onto the USB flash drive.
TIP:
The display will only show the first 16 characters of the file name. If the USB drive has multiple
firmware files, ensure that you can distinguish the files from the first 16 characters in their file
names.
2.
Insert the USB flash drive into the USB port on the back of the device.
3.
From the Home screen, press Previous or Next until the screen displays Support. Press Enter to
select.
4.
Press Previous or Next until the screen displays Autoloader FW upgrade. Press Enter to select.
5.
Enter the administrator password if prompted.
6.
Press Previous or Next until the screen displays the filename of the Autoloader firmware file on
the USB drive. Press Enter to select the firmware file.
7.
If the upgrade failed, press Enter to display the error code and message describing the cause of
the failure.
User and service guide
109
8.
Remove the USB flash drive from the USB port.
To upgrade drive firmware from a USB flash drive:
1.
Download current tape drive firmware from the Sun SunSolve website: http://sunsolve.sun.com.
Copy the firmware onto the USB flash drive.
TIP:
The display will only show the first 16 characters of the file name. If the USB drive
has multiple firmware files, ensure that you can distinguish the files from the first 16
characters in their file names.
2.
Insert the USB flash drive into the USB port on the back of the device.
3.
From the Home screen, press Previous or Next until the screen displays Support. Press Enter to
select.
4.
Press Previous or Next until the screen displays Drive FW Upgrade. Press Enter to select.
5.
Enter the administrator password if prompted.
6.
Press Previous or Next until the screen displays Drive FW Upgrade by USB. Press Enter to select.
7.
Press Previous or Next until the screen displays the filename of the drive firmware file on the USB
drive. Press Enter to select the firmware file.
8.
If the upgrade failed, press Enter to display the error code and message describing the cause of
the failure.
9.
Remove the USB flash drive from the USB port.
To update drive firmware from a firmware upgrade tape:
1.
Load a firmware upgrade tape into the mailslot or any open slot. If all slots are full, remove a data
tape to make room for the firmware upgrade tape.
2.
From the Home screen, press Previous or Next until the screen displays Support. Press Enter to
select.
3.
Press Previous or Next until the screen displays Drive FW Upgrade. Press Enter to select.
4.
Enter the administrator password if prompted.
5.
Press Previous or Next until the screen displays Drive FW Upgrade by Tape. Press Enter to select.
6.
Press Previous or Next until the screen displays one of the following: Drive 1. The second line
may read: Firmware: G39W or Drive 2 Firmware: G39W or All Drives. Press Enter to select
the appropriate drive to upgrade.
7.
Press Previous or Next until the display shows the correct slot location of the firmware upgrade
tape installed in the device (example) FW Tape Location Slot: Mailslot. Press Enter to select the
correct firmware tape location. The screen displays Upgrading Drive FW.
8.
When the update is complete, the screen displays either Success Export FW Tape, or Failed
Export FW Tape. If the upgrade failed, press Enter to display the error code and message
describing the cause of the failure.
9.
Remove the firmware upgrade tape from the device using either the mailslot or by removing
the magazine where the tape has been placed.
Viewing logs (Support > Autoloader Error Log)
The Autoloader keeps a log of recent error and warning messages. See “Error codes” on page 153 for
more information about error codes.
To access the error or warning log:
1.
110
From the Home screen, press Previous or Next until the screen displays Support. Press Enter to
select.
Operating the Autoloader or Library
2.
Press Previous or Next until the screen displays Autoloader Error Log to see error messages or
Autoloader Warning Log to see warnings. Press Enter to select.
3.
Enter the administrator password, if prompted.
4.
Press Enter to see the message description. Press Cancel to return to the message code.
5.
Press Next to see the next message.
Forcing the drive to eject a tape (Support > Force Drive To Eject Tape)
Use this option to make the tape drive eject the tape and place it into an open slot. Before issuing this
command, attempt to eject the tape with the move command (See “Moving tapes in the Autoloader
(Operations > Move Tape)” on page 105).
To force the tape to eject:
1.
From the Home screen, press Previous or Next until the screen displays Support. Press Enter to
select.
2.
Press Previous or Next until the screen displays Force Drive To Eject Tape. Press Enter to select.
3.
Press Previous or Next until the screen displays Drive, Drive 1 or Drive 2. The second line
on the display shows the bar code number of the tape, Full, or Empty. Press Enter to select
the desired drive to eject the tape.
4.
If the tape is successfully ejected from the drive, the screen displays the slot location where the
tape was moved to.
NOTE:
If the drive has difficulty ejecting the tape, suspect bad or damaged media.
User and service guide
111
SL48 operator control panel
Overview
The front panel includes:
• A liquid crystal display (LCD) that shows Tape Library status information and is used to
access the OCP menus.
• LEDs that illuminate to indicate Library conditions and alerts.
• Navigation buttons that allow you to scroll through, select, and make changes to different
OCP menus and settings.
This panel provides everything you need to monitor Library status and access the OCP menus.
Operations available using the OCP
• Info menu
• “Viewing status information (Info > Status)” on page 119
• “Viewing Library identity information (Info > Identity Library)” on page 120
• “Viewing drive identity information (Info > Identity Drives)” on page 120
• “Viewing inventory information (Info > Inventory)” on page 121
• “Viewing network information (Info > Network)” on page 121
• Configuration menu
• “Logical Libraries (Configuration > Set Logical Libraries)” on page 121
• “Changing the library configuration (Configuration > Library)” on page 121
• “Changing the drive configuration (Configuration > Drives)” on page 123
• “Changing the network configuration (Configuration > Network Configuration)” on page 123
• “Barcode reporting format (Configuration > Barcode Reporting)” on page 123
• “Changing the administrator password (Configuration > Set Admin Password)” on page 123
• “Restore defaults (Configuration > Restore Defaults)” on page 124
• “Setting the Library date and time (Configuration > Set Date and Time)” on page 125
• Display Contrast
• “Saving and restoring the Library configuration (Configuration > Save/Restore)” on page 125
• Operations menu
• Opening the mailslot (Operations > Open Mailslot)
• Unlocking, removing and replacing magazines (Operations > Unlock Left/Right Magazines)
• Moving Media (Operations > Move Media)
• Performing Inventory (Operations > Inventory)
• Enabling Password Locks (Operations > Enable Password Locks)
• Support menu
• “Powering drives on and off (Support > Power on/off Drives)” on page 127
• “Cleaning the tape drive (Support > Clean Drive)” on page 127
• “Running tests (Support > Run Tests)” on page 128
• “Viewing logs (Support > View Logs)” on page 128
• “Updating library and drive firmware (Support > FW Upgrade)” on page 128
• “Force ejecting a drive (Support > Force Drive Eject)” on page 129
• “Rebooting the tape library (Support > Reboot) ” on page 129
112
Operating the Autoloader or Library
Operator control panel navigation buttons
Four menus are accessed through the operator control panel: Info, Configuration, Operations and
Support. Use the navigation buttons to select menu items and work with the screen displays. The
navigation buttons have different functions depending upon where you are in the menu structure
(see Table 18 and Table 19).
Table 18 OCP buttons
Operator control panel buttons
1
Number
Description
1.
Power button
2.
Navigation buttons
3.
OK button
2
3
10854
Table 19 Navigation buttons
Right
Moves to the next item at the current menu level. When a top‐level menu item
is highlighted, this moves to the next menu item, for example, from Info to
Configuration. When a digit is highlighted on a screen field, this moves to the next
digit. If there is no next item, this button is not active.
Left
Moves to the previous item at the current menu level. When a top‐level menu item is
highlighted, this moves to the previous menu item, for example, from Configuration
to Info. When a pull‐down menu is displayed, the left button can be used to close or
collapse that menu. When a digit is highlighted on a screen field, this moves to the
previous digit. If there is no previous item, this button is not active.
Up
Scrolls upwards through available choices at the current menu level. (If used on the
top item it returns to the bottom item.) When a menu pull‐down is displayed, this
scrolls through all items for that menu. When a screen is displayed, this highlights
individual lines. When editable fields are highlighted, this scrolls through available
choices for that field.
Down
Scrolls downwards through available choices at the current menu level. (If used on
the bottom item it returns to the top item.) If used from a top‐level menu item, it
highlights the top selection in the sub‐menu. When a sub‐menu is displayed, this
scrolls through all items for that menu. When a screen is displayed, this highlights
individual lines. When editable fields are highlighted, this scrolls through available
choices for that field.
OK
Selects the highlighted menu or screen item. If used from a top‐level menu item, it
displays the sub‐menu with no items highlighted; press OK a second time to return to
the top‐level menu. When a sub‐menu is displayed, OK selects the highlighted menu
item. In a configuration screen, the OK button toggles from navigation to editing a
selection. Navigate to an option you wish to change and press OK to edit it. Once the
item has been changed, press OK again to go back into navigation mode. The OK
button is also used for selecting highlighted choices such as <Save> or <Cancel>.
Using the OCP
Each time the Tape Library is powered on or rebooted, or after five minutes of inactivity, a splash
screen is briefly displayed, after which the OCP menu is displayed, showing current system status
information.
User and service guide
113
You will be required to enter the administrator password for all functions that are password‐protected.
Figure 75 OCP menu, showing initial system status information
The OCP menu includes a status message bar, menu bar, and display area. Initial system status
information includes basic Library, drive, and magazine status and information. All drives that have
been activated are included. If drives are subsequently removed or powered down, they will still be
listed on this screen until you restore defaults.
Status message bar
The highlighted line above Info, Configuration, Operations and Support is always visible. It shows
the time and overall status of the Library. Status definitions are listed in Table 20.
Table 20 Library status
Status
Definition
Ready
Library is ready for normal operation
Warning
Library is in a warning condition such as a drive needs cleaning (normal operation)
Error
Library is in an error condition (normal operation)
Offline
Library is running tests
Load
Library is loading a tape
Unload
Library is unloading a tape
Menu bar
The menu bar contains four groups of menu functions:
• Info
• Configuration
• Operations
• Support
114
Operating the Autoloader or Library
HOME
Info
Configuration
Operations
Support
Status
Logical Libraries
Open Mailslot(s)
Power on/off Drives
Identity Library
Library
Unlock
Left Magazines
Clean Drive
Inventory
Identity
Drives
Drives
Unlock
Right Magazines
Run Tests
Network
Inventory
Network
Move Media
View Logs
Network
Barcode Reporting
Inventory
FW Upgrade
Set Admin Password
Enable
Password Locks
Force Drive Eject
Requires
administrator
password
Requires Sun
Service password
(Sun Service
personnel only)
Restore Defaults
Reboot
Display
Set
Date Contrast
and Time
Sun Service
Display Contrast
Save/Restore
11409
Figure 76 Operator control panel menu
Administrator password
TIP:
By default, the administrator password is unset; all of the digits are null. You must set the
administrator password from the OCP to protect the administrator functions on the OCP and
enable the administrator functions in the RMI.
The administrator password grants access to all OCP functions except Service. A user without
knowledge of the administrator password can access:
• Info: Status, Identity Library, Identity Drives, Inventory, and Network
• Configuration: Display Contrast
User and service guide
115
• Operations: Open Mailslots, Inventory, and Enable Password Locks
All other Configuration, Operations, and Support options are locked.
After five minutes of inactivity, the OCP returns to the splash screen. To access password‐protected
tasks, you must reenter the administrator password.
The administrator password is originally null. Sun strongly recommends that you assign a password
during the installation process, see Changing the administrator password (Configuration > Set Admin
Password). You will not be able to access the administrator functions of the Tape Library from the
remote management interface (RMI) until the administrator password is set.
Screens that require entry of a password are indicated by a padlock icon on the menu list and prompt
the user to enter the password before allowing access to the restricted screens. Once entered, the
administrator password does not need to be entered a second time unless there is no user activity for
five minutes or unless the password locks are re‐enabled.
Passwords must be exactly eight digits consisting of the numbers 0 through 9.
To enter a password when prompted, do the following:
1.
The left most digit of the password will be highlighted; each non‐highlighted digit will appear as
an X.
Use the
Up and
Down buttons until the correct digit is displayed.
Use the
Left and
Right buttons to select the other digits and use the
Up and
Down
buttons to alter the values.
nl
nl
2.
Press OK to submit the password. The screen continues to the restricted area.
NOTE:
If you forget the administrator password, you cannot enter a new password. You
must call your customer service representative.
Illustrated menu option and navigation examples
The following examples illustrate how to use the menu options and navigation buttons to open
mailslots and to move media. Subsequent menu options described in this chapter do not include
step‐by‐step instructions.
Opening mailslots (Operations > Open Mailslots)
The mailslots are used only with host system software that supports this feature. The mailslot feature
allows you to insert or remove up to three tapes.
Left magazines are available without mailslots, with one mailslot, or with three mailslots. The SL48
Tape Libraries are shipped with the 3‐mailslot magazine on the lower left side. Mailslot‐capable
left magazines are marked with a white dot on the lower right corner that aligns with a white dot
on the front bezel, as shown in Figure 77. Placing a mailslot magazine in any location other than the
lower‐left location will result in the magazine being treated as a magazine with no mailslots.
116
Operating the Autoloader or Library
2
1
10848
Figure 77 Mailslot‐capable magazine and slot, each marked with a white dot
The Library will eject the mailslot in the lower left magazine when instructed to open mailslots. After
the mailslot is closed, the Library will inventory the tapes in the mailslot, but not the rest of the tapes
in the magazine, which allows the Library to resume operations sooner.
NOTE:
If you exchange the magazine in the lower‐left position with one that has different mailslot
capabilities, the Library displays a warning that the mailslot type is incompatible with the
configuration.
To access the mailslots:
1.
Highlight Operations ‐> Open Mailslots and press OK to select it.
Figure 78 Operations menu
User and service guide
117
2.
The mailslot located in the lower left magazine ejects automatically. Pull the magazine out until
you can access the tape cartridge (see Figure 79).
11350
Figure 79 Removing the existing tape from the mailslot
NOTE:
The following message may be displayed: Mailslot opening. No button pushes
are accepted during this time.
NOTE:
If the SCSI Prevent/Allow Media Removal bit is set, the mailslot cannot be
unlocked/opened from the front panel and the following message is displayed:
Media Removal Prevented by Host Software. Press OK to continue and return to the
open mailslot pull‐down menu. Try the operation again from the backup software.
3.
The following message is displayed: Please close Mailslot(s). Remove the existing tape cartridges
from the mailslot and insert new tape cartridges, as required.
4.
Push the mailslot back into the Library.
Moving Media (Operations > Move Media)
This option instructs the Library to move a cartridge from a tape drive, a tape slot in any magazine or
the mailslot in the left magazine to any other location not already holding a tape. This option also lets
you load and unload tape cartridges to and from the installed tape drives. To use this command, you
must first select where you want to move the tape from (in one of the Source fields), and then indicate
where you want to move the tape to (in one of the Destinations fields).
Source Type: This toggles between all available sources: mailslot, magazines, and the active drives.
Source ‐> Source by Label: If appropriate, this toggles between available source cartridges. In the
following example, the source type is a magazine, so you need to select a cartridge from the magazine.
You can do this by selecting a specific slot (Source field) or specifying the target cartridge’s barcode
(Source by Label field). Only Full source slots are available for selection.
Destination Type: This toggles between all available destinations: Mailslot, Magazine and Drive.
Destination: If appropriate, this option allows you to specify the cartridge destination. For a
magazine, select a slot. Only Empty destination slots are available for selection.
Access to the Move Media option requires the use of the administrator password.
To move a tape in the Library:
118
Operating the Autoloader or Library
1.
Highlight Operations ‐> Move Media and press OK to select it.
Figure 80 Operations menu
2.
Enter the administrator password if prompted.
3.
Use the Up and Down arrows to move to the Source Type field and press OK.
4.
Use the Up and Down arrows to change the value of the highlighted field. When the highlighted
field shows the desired value, press OK to select.
5.
If appropriate, move to the Source field and press OK. Repeat step 4 to specify the source
cartridge.
6.
Use the Up and Down arrows to move to the Destination Type field and press OK.
7.
Use the Up and Down arrows to change the value of the highlighted field. When the highlighted
field shows the desired value, press OK to select.
8.
If appropriate, move to the Destination field and press OK. Repeat step 7 to specify the cartridge
destination
9.
Use the Up and Down arrows to move to the <Move> area and press OK to carry out the
operation (or move to the <Cancel> area and press OK to cancel the operation).
The Library now moves the tape from the selected source to the selected destination. While the
tape is being moved, the screen displays Moving Tape. Once the tape has been moved, the screen
displays either Move Complete, or Move Failed. If the move failed, press OK to display the
error code and message explaining the failure.
Info menu
The Info menu options provide the following options. None of these options is password protected.
•
•
•
•
•
“Viewing status information (Info > Status)” on page 119
“Viewing Library identity information (Info > Identity Library)” on page 120
“Viewing drive identity information (Info > Identity Drives)” on page 120
“Viewing inventory information (Info > Inventory)” on page 121
“Viewing network information (Info > Network)” on page 121
Viewing status information (Info > Status)
Status information can be displayed for the system, the Library, or for a specific drive.
User and service guide
119
NOTE:
The number of drives available for selection in the Status menu depends on the number of drives
that have been active in the Library. For a Library that has only two drives, the menu displays
Drive 1 and Drive 2. For a Library that has four drives, the menu displays Drive 1, Drive 2, Drive 3
and Drive 4 (even though the status of some may be offline or missing).
• Library: displays the status of the Library without the drives. It shows the Library status,
odometer, power on time, robotic status, slot and barcode of any cartridge in transport, number
of free and total slots, and status of the mailslots.
• Drives: displays the status of the selected drive. It shows the drive status, source slot, tape
barcode, error code (if appropriate), drive temperature, status of cooling fan, and drive activity.
For Fibre Channel drives, the following additional items are displayed:
• The link status of each port may be: No Light, Logged In, Logged Out, ALPA Conflict,
or Negotiation Link. No Light or ALPA Conflict indicates an error condition. See
“Fibre Channel connection problems” on page 134.
• The speed for each port: 1 Gb/s, 2 Gb/s, or 4 Gb/s.
NOTE:
Use the Left or Right buttons to toggle through the status information for all drives without
returning to the Info ‐> Status sub‐menu.
Viewing identity information (Info > Identity Library)
Displays
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Library serial number
Library product ID
Controller and bootcode firmware revisions
Library mode
Number of reserved slots
Status of the mailslot
Library LUN Host Drive
A Fibre Channel Library also displays the WW Node Name for the FC node to which it is connected.
World Wide names are assigned automatically; they cannot be configured.
Viewing identity information (Info > Identity Drives)
Displays the status of the selected drive. It shows the SCSI ID, physical drive number, serial number,
firmware revision, element address, the ID string, and whether the drive is the Library LUN host drive.
The following additional information is displayed for a Fibre Channel drive:
• WWide Node Name for the FC node to which the tape drive is connected.
• WWide Port Name and Port Type for Port A.
• WWide Port Name and Port Type for Port B.
NOTE:
Use the Left or Right buttons to toggle through the identity information for all drives without
returning to the Info ‐> Identity menu.
World Wide names are assigned automatically; they cannot be configured.
120
Operating the Autoloader or Library
Viewing inventory information (Info > Inventory)
Inventory information can be displayed for a magazine or for a drive.
• Magazine: The first inventory screen displays the contents of magazine number 1 (lower left).
The top section of this screen shows which mailslots are occupied (shaded background) or
empty (white background). If the mailslot is enabled, the storage slot count is reduced. The
lower section gives more information about each slot. Mailslots are identified in the Slot
column as MS1, MS2 or MS3. The label shows any barcode details. Slots containing tapes
without barcodes are labeled Full. Info shows whether the tape is write‐protected (WP) or if
that media needs attention (!) Use the Left or Right buttons to scroll through and view the
inventory for all magazines.
• Drive: This screen displays the contents of each drive. The Label column identifies which
tape is in the drive and the Source column identifies the slot from which it came. Other
information defines the type of tape (data or cleaning) and whether tapes are write‐protected
or valid/invalid.
Viewing network information (Info > Network)
This option provides information about the network setting for the Library. This screen will show
information about the network connectivity of the Library. If DHCP is ON, the values currently being
found by DHCP for IP Addr, Netmask and Gateway will be displayed.
Configuration menu
The Configuration menu provides the following options:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
“Logical Libraries (Configuration > Set Logical Libraries)” on page 121
“Changing the library configuration (Configuration > Library)” on page 121
“Changing the drive configuration (Configuration > Drives)” on page 123
“Changing the network configuration (Configuration > Network Configuration)” on page 123
“Barcode reporting format (Configuration > Barcode Reporting)” on page 123
“Changing the administrator password (Configuration > Set Admin Password)” on page 123
“Restore defaults (Configuration > Restore Defaults)” on page 124
“Setting the Library date and time (Configuration > Set Date and Time)” on page 125
Display Contrast
“Saving and restoring the Library configuration (Configuration > Save/Restore)” on page 125
Changing the number of logical libraries (Configuration > Logical Libraries)
This option allows you to specify the number of logical libraries for the physical Tape Library. For
more information about logical libraries, see “Logical libraries” on page 22.
Access to this feature requires the administrator password.
Changing the Library configuration (Configuration > Library)
This option allows you to specify the drive that is assigned as master drive and the Library mode, and
define how many slots are active and whether the mailslots are enabled.
Access to this feature requires the administrator password.
• Library Master Drive: This option designates which drive acts as the master and hosts the
Library LUN.
NOTE:
The Library’s SCSI ID will be the master drive’s SCSI ID with a LUN of 1.
User and service guide
121
• Library Mode: The Library supports three behavior modes: Random, Sequential, and
Automatic. The Library automatically detects the required mode from the series of SCSI
commands it receives; however, you can also change the mode. Choose the operating mode
based on the capabilities of the software controlling the tape cartridges. The Library mode can
be set independently for each logical library.
• Reserved Slots: This option sets the number of reserved slots in the Library. Reserved slots are
slots that can be accessed by the remote management interface (RMI) and the operator control
panel (OCP), but are invisible to the host and backup software. You can reserve up to 46 slots.
• Mailslots enabled: This option enables or disables mailslots. All three mailslots are enabled
or disabled based on this setting.
• Auto Cleaning: This option enables or disables automatic cleaning.
Library modes
The Library supports three behavior modes: Random, Sequential, and Automatic.
Random mode: In Random mode, the device does not automatically load tapes into the tape drives; it
waits for commands from the software or operator to load and unload tapes. Random mode is used
with a full featured or a robotics‐aware backup application and is the most common mode of operation.
Your backup software must support robotics, which may require an additional software module.
Sequential mode: In Sequential mode, the device automatically loads and unloads tapes from the
drive. Sequential mode is used when the backup software is NOT robotics‐aware or was designed
for standalone drives only.
In Sequential mode, the Autoloader or Library will only use the lowest‐numbered tape drive.
The operator begins the sequence by loading the desired tape into the tape drive. When a tape is
unloaded for any reason, the device automatically removes the tape from the drive, returns it to its
original slot, then loads the tape from the next available higher numbered slot.
To further determine how you want tapes loaded into the tape drive while in Sequential mode, you
can set the Loop and Autoload options.
• When Autoload mode is set, the device automatically loads the cartridge from the lowest‐numbered
full slot into the tape drive. It then follows standard sequential operation.
• When Loop mode is on, the original first cartridge in the sequence is reloaded after the device
has cycled through all available cartridges. If Loop mode is off and the last cartridge has been
unloaded, the device stops loading cartridges until you load another manually.
CAUTION:
Use caution when choosing Loop mode because it makes it possible to overwrite data on
previously written cartridges.
When a Library is partitioned into logical libraries, each logical library operates as an independent
library. Thus, the Library only loads tapes from the slots associated with one logical library into the
tape drive associated with that logical library; it will not load tapes from slots associated with another
logical library. Only the lowest‐numbered tape drive in a multi‐drive logical library will be used.
Automatic mode: In Automatic mode, the device switches from Sequential mode into Random mode
when it receives certain SCSI commands. Automatic mode is the default setting.
Automatic cleaning
When auto clean is enabled, the Tape Library automatically loads a cleaning cartridge when a tape
drive needs to be cleaned. The Library identifies a tape cartridge as a cleaning cartridge if it has a
barcode label that starts with CLN or after an unlabeled cleaning tape has been loaded into the tape
drive.
The Library can use a cleaning cartridge from any slot, even if the slot is reserved. The Library keeps
track of the usage count for each of the cleaning cartridges. When multiple cleaning cartridges are
available, the Library will first choose an unknown cleaning cartridge so the Library can start tracking
122
Operating the Autoloader or Library
the cartridge’s usage count. If the Library knows the usage count for all of the cleaning cartridges, the
Library will choose the one with the highest usage count.
Auto cleaning is disabled by default. You can enable automatic cleaning even if there are no cleaning
cartridges in the device. In this case, the device will display a warning message.
CAUTION:
Only enable automatic cleaning in either the backup application or the Library, not both.
Changing the drive configuration (Configuration > Drives)
Parallel SCSI drives: This option allows you to configure the SCSI ID of the drive.
CAUTION:
If you change the SCSI ID, you must also cycle power on the host server and reconfigure the
backup software before using the Library.
Fibre Channel drives: This option allows you to configure the Fibre Speed, Type, ALPA, and Loop
mode for the drive’s Fibre Channel ports. See “Changing the drive configuration” on page 72 for more
information about configuring the Fibre Channel ports.
Access to this feature requires the administrator password.
To change the drive configuration:
1.
Highlight the setting you want to change. Press OK to select the value field.
2.
Press the
the value.
Up or
Down buttons until the correct value is displayed. Press OK to accept
3.
Press the
Up or
Down buttons to navigate to <Save>. Press OK to save.
Changing the network configuration (Configuration > Network)
The Library can automatically obtain an IP address from a DHCP server when the Library is powered
up. The Library also supports user‐specified fixed addresses through the front panel. This option
allows the operator to set the network settings or allow the Library to autoconfigure using the DHCP
server settings.
Access to this feature requires the administrator password.
Barcode reporting format (Configuration > Barcode Reporting)
This option sets the format for displaying the tape bar codes for both the operator control panel and
the host. With this option, you can configure the number of characters to display and the justification
of those numbers to the left or right. Access to this feature requires the administrator password.
Setting and changing the administrator password (Configuration > Set Admin Password)
This option allows you to change the administrator password. Access to this feature requires the
administrator password or the Service password. Passwords consist of exactly eight characters each
between the value of 0 and 9.
Restricted areas (indicated by a padlock icon) prompt for this administrator password before granting
access. Once entered, the administrator password does not have to be entered a second time unless
there is no user activity for five minutes. To access this screen, enter the administrator password
first, if you have not already done so.
User and service guide
123
NOTE:
If you forget the administrator password, you cannot enter a new password. You must call your
customer service representative.
Restore defaults (Configuration > Restore Defaults)
This option returns the Library to its original shipping configuration, leaving the settings necessary for
the RMI. Access to this feature requires the administrator password.
The following settings are reset:
• SCSI addresses:
• For full‐height tape drives the default SCSI address is 4. For half‐height drives, the default
SCSI address for the bottom drive in each full‐height drive bay is 4 and the default SCSI
address for the top drive is 5 as shown in Figure 81.
2
1
11435
Figure 81 SL48 parallel SCSI tape drive default SCSI addresses
1. Tape drives with SCSI address 4
2. Tape drives with SCSI address 5
The Library will no longer recall drives that have been removed.
• Master drive: reset to Drive 1 or the lowest numbered existing drive
• Drive power: all drives powered on
• Active slots: maximum possible
• Library mode: Automatic
• Loop: No
• Event log levels and filter: continuous trace and all levels and filters active (for Service use only)
• Barcode reader label length: 8
• Barcode reader alignment: Left
• Error recovery: On
• Mailslot configuration: mailslot disabled
• Auto clean: disabled
• SNMP: disabled, but saved addresses do not change
• E‐mail notification: disabled, but configurations retained
The following settings are not reset:
• Administrator password
• Network settings (network is always enabled and the network addresses are retained)
• Date and time
124
Operating the Autoloader or Library
IMPORTANT:
When the defaults are restored, the Library will rediscover and renumber the tape drives from
the bottom of the Library up. If a tape drive was added between two other tape drives since the
last time the drives were discovered, that tape drive and the ones above it will be renumbered.
You might need to update the configuration of the backup application when tape drives are
renumbered.
Setting the Library date and time (Configuration > Set Date and Time)
This option sets the date and time used by the Library to record events. Access to this feature requires
the administrator password.
NOTE:
Time is based on a 24‐hour clock. There is no a.m. or p.m. designation. For example: 1:00 p.m. is
13:00.
Saving and restoring the Library configuration (Configuration > Save/Restore)
This option saves the Library configuration to a USB flash drive and restores the configuration from
the USB flash drive.
The configuration settings that are saved are:
• Administrator password
• Mailslot configuration
• All network settings, including DHCP, DNS, IPv4 and IPv6 addresses
• Barcode reader label length and barcode reader alignment
• Reserved slots
• Display contrast setting
• Library mode
• All drive configuration settings
• Auto clean
• SNMP addresses and configurations
• Log tracing configuration
• Email notification configuration (SMTP address, email address, filter level)
• Option to allow the magazine access without the administrator password
• Option to ignore the barcode media ID
• Logical library configuration
Operations menu
The Operations menu contains the following Library operation options:
•
•
•
•
•
“Opening the mailslot (Operations > Open Mailslot)” on page 126
“Unlocking, removing and replacing magazines (Operations > Unlock Left/Right Magazines)” on page 126
“Moving Media (Operations > Move Media)” on page 126
“Performing Inventory (Operations > Inventory)” on page 127
“Enabling Password Locks (Operations > Enable Password Locks)” on page 127
User and service guide
125
Opening the mailslot (Operations > Open Mailslot)
The mailslots are used only with host system software that supports this feature. The mailslot feature
allows you to insert or remove up to three tapes.
Left magazines are available without mailslots, with one mailslot, or with three mailslots. The SL48
Tape Libraries are shipped with the 3‐mailslot magazine on the lower left side. Mailslot‐capable
left magazines are marked with a white dot on the lower right corner that aligns with a white dot
on the front bezel, as shown in Figure 82. Placing a mailslot magazine in any location other than the
lower‐left location will result in the magazine being treated as a magazine with no mailslots.
2
1
10848
Figure 82 Mailslot‐capable magazine and slot, each marked with a white dot
The Library will push the mailslot open when instructed to open mailslots. After the mailslot is closed,
the Library will inventory the tapes in the mailslot, but not the rest of the tapes in the magazine, which
allows the Library to resume operations sooner.
NOTE:
If you exchange the magazine in the lower‐left position with one that has different mailslot
capabilities, the Library displays a warning that the mailslot type is incompatible with the
configuration.
Unlocking, removing and replacing magazines (Operations > Unlock Left/Right Magazines
This option grants access to the left and right magazines. After exchanging tapes in a magazine, slide
the magazine completely into the Library. The magazine locks into place. Access to the magazines
requires the use of the administrator password.
Once all left or right magazines are correctly installed, the Library inventories the magazines. The
Ready LED blinks during the inventory operation.
NOTE:
Due to the Library design, all left or all right magazines will be unlocked. The Library will halt
robotic functions until all magazines are present. It is not possible to unlock all of the magazines at
once from the front panel.
Moving Media (Operations > Move Media)
This option instructs the Library to move a cartridge from a tape drive, a tape slot in any magazine or
a mailslot to any other location not already holding a tape. This option also lets you load and unload
tape cartridges to and from the installed tape drives. To use this command, you must first select where
you want to move the tape from (in one of the Source fields), and then indicate where you want to
move the tape to (in one of the Destinations fields).
Source Type: This toggles between all available mailslot, magazines. and drives.
Source ‐> Source by Label: If appropriate, this toggles between available source cartridges. Only Full
source slots are available for selection.
126
Operating the Autoloader or Library
Destination Type: This toggles between all available destinations: Mailslot, Magazine, and Drive.
Destination: If appropriate, this option allows you to specify the cartridge destination. For a
magazine, select a slot. Only Empty destination slots are available for selection.
Access to the Move Media option requires the use of the administrator password.
Performing Inventory (Operations > Inventory)
This option updates the inventory status of the Library. The Library checks each slot and drive for bar
codes and determines if tapes are present or not.
NOTE:
This command is needed only if the inventory in the Library is different than the inventory
displayed on the front panel, which would not happen under normal conditions.
Enabling Password Locks (Operations > Enable Password Locks)
This option locks the restricted areas. This is typically used if the operator does not want to wait for
the time out to reset the locks. Power cycling or Library Reset also resets the locks.
Support menu
The following Support menu options are available:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
“Powering drives on and off (Support > Power on/off Drives)” on page 127
“Cleaning the tape drive (Support > Clean Drive)” on page 127
“Running tests (Support > Run Tests)” on page 128
“Viewing logs (Support > View Logs)” on page 128
“Updating library and drive firmware (Support > FW Upgrade)” on page 128
“Force ejecting a drive (Support > Force Drive Eject)” on page 129
“Rebooting the tape library (Support > Reboot) ” on page 129
Powering drives on and off (Support > Power on/off Drives)
This option allows the powering up or down of a drive without interrupting power to the rest of the
Library and the other drives. This is typically used when replacing one drive. Access to this feature
requires the administrator password.
Cleaning the tape drive (Support > Clean Drive)
This option allows you to clean the drives. Access to this feature requires the administrator password.
When the Clean drive LED is on, the tape drive needs to be cleaned. Cleaning times can range from
a few seconds to a few minutes during which time the Ready LED blinks. Use only the designated
cleaning cartridge for your tape drive model. To order data and cleaning cartridges, please use the
contact information below to locate the nearest Sun tape media reseller:
In the US contact 1‐877‐STK‐TAPE
In EAME contact 33 (0) 1 69 038341
nl
nl
Use only Ultrium Universal cleaning cartridges.
IMPORTANT:
If the cleaning cartridge is not a valid cleaning cartridge, the LCD screen displays Invalid Tape
and the cartridge is exported.
User and service guide
127
IMPORTANT:
If the Clean drive LED, or the Media Attention LED (on load or unload) occurs when inserting the
same cartridge after you have cleaned the drive, there may be a problem with that cartridge.
When using the operator control panel to clean the tape drive, import the cleaning cartridge into
the mailslot or any other empty slot before beginning the cleaning steps. If you would like to keep
a cleaning cartridge in the Library, the backup software must manage tape drive cleaning or be
configured to bypass the slot containing the cleaning cartridge.
The Clean drive option lets you load a cleaning tape into any active drive. To use this command, you
must first select the drive to be cleaned and then select where you want to load the cleaning tape from.
• Source Type: This toggles between all available sources: Mailslot, Magazine.
• Source/Source by Label: If appropriate, this toggles between available source cartridges.
Barcode labels beginning with CLN are automatically displayed at the top of the list.
After cleaning, the Library returns the cleaning cartridge to the original slot. If you loaded the
cartridge from the front panel, you should now unload it from that slot either by using the mailslot, or
by removing the magazine. When the tape drive cleaning is complete, the Clean LED turns off (if
previously on).
Running tests (Support > Run Tests)
This option allows you to run a demo, a wellness test or a slot to slot test and to specify the number of
test cycles required. You can abort the test at any time, if required. Access to this feature requires
the administrator password. For more information about the wellness test, see “The wellness
test” on page 151.
NOTE:
Abort is available only on the operator control panel. You cannot abort a test that has been started
from the RMI.
Viewing logs (Support > View Logs)
This option allows you to view the following logs: Error, Warning, Informational, Configuration, and
All Events possible. Access to this feature requires the administrator password.
Updating Library and drive firmware (Support > FW Upgrade)
The Tape Library allows two types of firmware to be upgraded — one for the tape drives and the other
for the Tape Library itself. You can upgrade both types of firmware from a USB flash drive or RMI.
Using a USB flash drive to upgrade firmware (Support > FW Upgrade > By USB)
This option allows you to upgrade Tape Library or tape drive firmware using a USB flash drive in
the Tape Library’s USB port on the back panel. No operations will be available until the upgrade
completes. Access to this feature requires the administrator password.
To update firmware using a USB flash drive:
1.
Download current Library firmware from the Sun SunSolve website: http://sunsolve.sun.com.
Copy the firmware onto the USB flash drive.
2.
Insert the USB flash drive into the USB port on the back of the device.
3.
From the Support menu, select FW Upgrade > By USB.
4.
Select the target for the upgrade, which will be one of the tape drives or the Library, and select the
filename of the firmware.
128
Operating the Autoloader or Library
5.
Click Upgrade.
6.
When the upgrade is complete, remove the USB flash drive from the USB port.
Force ejecting a drive (Support > Force Drive Eject)
This option attempts to force the tape drive to eject the tape and place it into an open slot in the
Library. Access to this feature requires the administrator password.
Before issuing this command, Sun recommends that you attempt to eject the tape using the backup
software and move command on the operator control panel. While a drive is being force ejected, a
window indicating the process is ongoing should appear. No operations will be available until force
eject completes.
NOTE:
If the drive has difficulty ejecting the tape, suspect bad or damaged media.
Rebooting the Tape Library (Support > Reboot)
This option reboots the Tape Library and the tape drives within the Library and forces a new cartridge
inventory, clearing any current error condition. It updates drive lists in sub‐menus. Access to this
feature requires the administrator password.
CAUTION:
This option interrupts the current backup or restore operation and causes the operation to fail. It is
primarily used if the Library is in an error state.
User and service guide
129
130
Operating the Autoloader or Library
5 Troubleshooting
CAUTION:
The SL24 Tape Autoloader and SL48 Tape Library are designed to operate when installed in a rack
using the included rack rails. The SL24 Tape Autoloader and SL48 Tape Library can also be set
on a flat surface when mounted in the optional Rack‐to‐Tabletop Conversion Kit. Operating a
SL24 Tape Autoloader or SL48 Tape Library without one of these kits, such as on a flat surface
without the Rack‐to‐Tabletop Conversion Kit, could result in device errors. Placing any weight
on top of the device might also cause errors.
CAUTION:
Shipping Lock: The shipping lock must be removed for the robotics to work properly.
The device displays a robot move error if the shipping lock is not removed (see
“Removing the shipping lock” on page 36).
Detection problems after installing a parallel SCSI device
Problems encountered after installation are often caused by improper parallel SCSI bus configuration,
application software configuration errors, or an incorrectly configured operating system. If the
application software or operating system does not communicate with the device after installation,
determine the extent of the detection problem:
• Does the application software detect the tape drive?
• Does the application software detect the Autoloader or Library?
• Does the operating system detect the tape drive?
• Does the operating system detect the Autoloader or Library?
• Does the operating system detect the Autoloader or Library, but list it as a generic device?
Based on the extent of the detection problem, check the following:
• If neither the application software nor operating system detects the tape drive, or they do not
detect both the tape drive and the Autoloader or Library:
• Check the SCSI ID and change it if necessary. The default SCSI ID for each tape drive will
be 4 or 5 depending on the Autoloader or Library model and drive slot:
• SL24: For full‐height tape drives the default SCSI address is 4. For half‐height drives,
the default SCSI address for the bottom drive is 4 and the default SCSI address for
the top drive is 5 as shown in Figure 83.
2
1
11434
Figure 83 SL24 parallel SCSI tape drive default SCSI addresses
1. Tape drives with SCSI address 4
2. Tape drives with SCSI address 5
User and service guide
131
• SL48: For full‐height tape drives the default SCSI address is 4. For half‐height drives,
the default SCSI address for the bottom drive in each full‐height drive bay is 4 and the
default SCSI address for the top drive is 5 as shown in Figure 84.
2
1
11435
Figure 84 SL48 parallel SCSI tape drive default SCSI addresses
1. Tape drives with SCSI address 4
2. Tape drives with SCSI address 5
Depending on other devices attached to the same parallel SCSI bus and their SCSI IDs, you
may need to change the SCSI ID before using the device. Review the manuals for the other
devices on the parallel SCSI bus or your operating system to determine which SCSI IDs are
currently in use. Change the SCSI ID with the OCP (for the SL24 see “Changing the SCSI
address — parallel SCSI devices (Configuration > Change Drive)” on page 98, for the SL48
see “Changing the drive configuration (Configuration > Drives)” on page 123) or RMI (see
“Changing the drive configuration” on page 72).
• Verify that all parallel SCSI cables are securely connected on both ends. Check the length
and integrity of your parallel SCSI cabling. Check the parallel SCSI connector for bent pins.
The length of the internal parallel SCSI cabling inside the device is 0.5 m (1.6 ft). This length
must be included in any calculations of cable length.
• For LVD SCSI, the maximum length with only a single device on the parallel SCSI
bus is 25 m (82 ft).
• For Ultra 320 or multiple devices on an LVD bus, the maximum combined
internal/external length is 12 m (40 ft).
• If you have a combination of LVD and SE devices on the bus, the maximum cable length
reverts to the SE specification, which for Ultra devices is 3 m (10 ft) for four or fewer
devices, and 1.5 m (5 ft) for more than four devices.
• If the application software or operating system detects the tape drive, but not the Autoloader
or Library:
• Verify that multiple LUN support is enabled on the HBA. The device uses two Logical
Unit Numbers (LUNs) to control the tape drive (LUN 0) and robotic (LUN 1). The device
requires an HBA with multiple LUN support and multiple LUN support must be enabled
on the host computer. When multiple LUN support is not enabled, the host computer can
see the tape drive, but not the Autoloader or Library.
NOTE:
Many RAID or array controllers do not provide multiple LUN support.
• If the application software or operating system does not detect any devices on the HBA:
• Verify that your parallel SCSI host adapter is installed correctly. Refer to the manual that
came with your parallel SCSI host adapter for installation and troubleshooting instructions.
Pay particular attention to any steps describing configuration settings. Make sure that the
host adapter is properly seated in the motherboard slot and the operating system correctly
132
Troubleshooting
detects the host adapter. Make sure that the proper device driver is installed for the parallel
SCSI host adapter.
• If the Autoloader or Library is detected by the operating system, but not by the application
software:
• Refer to the documentation included with your backup application for instructions on
how to verify proper installation. Some backup software packages require an additional
module to communicate with the robotics.
• If the Autoloader or Library is detected by the operating system, but is listed as an unknown or
generic device:
• Make sure that the proper device driver, if applicable, is installed for the device. Check
your software provider’s website for the latest drivers and patches.
NOTE:
Many backup applications use their own drivers. Before installing a driver, make sure it is
not in conflict with the application software.
If you continue to have problems with a parallel SCSI Autoloader or Library, check the following:
• Ensure that the device is compatible with the parallel SCSI host adapter and backup
application you plan to use. For a list of compatible parallel SCSI host bus adapters and
application software, check with your parallel SCSI host adapter manufacturer and backup
application vendor.
NOTE:
The host bus adapter should be SCSI‐3 LVDS. A single‐ended parallel SCSI host bus adapter
severely degrades performance. Also, if any SE devices are on the same parallel SCSI bus, all of
the devices on the bus slow down to SE speed, which severely degrades performance.
The Autoloader or Library is NOT compatible with a standard differential (Diff) or
high‐voltage differential (HVD) SCSI bus.
• Verify that your HBA is supported by the host computer and qualified with the Autoloader
or Library.
• If one of the ports on the device is not connected to another parallel SCSI device, the port must
be terminated. Only the devices physically located at the beginning and end of the parallel
SCSI bus should be terminated. Refer to the manuals supplied with the other devices on the
parallel SCSI bus for information on enabling or disabling termination on those devices.
• To terminate the second parallel SCSI port on the device, locate the terminator in the
accessories package and press it firmly into either of the two parallel SCSI connectors on the
back panel. Secure the terminator by tightening the finger‐screws until snug. The supplied
terminator is “dual mode” and works on both Low‐Voltage Differential (LVD) and Single
Ended (SE) SCSI buses. Check all parallel SCSI and power connections and confirm that the
unit is attached to a valid SCSI SE or LVDS bus.
Detection problems after installing a SAS device
Problems encountered after installation are often caused by improper SAS cable connections,
application software configuration errors, or an incorrectly configured operating system. If the
application software or operating system does not communicate with the device after installation,
determine the extent of the detection problem:
•
•
•
•
•
Does the application software detect the tape drive?
Does the application software detect the Autoloader or Library?
Does the operating system detect the tape drive?
Does the operating system detect the Autoloader or Library?
Does the operating system detect the Autoloader or Library, but list it as a generic device?
User and service guide
133
Based on the extent of the detection problem, check the following:
• If neither the application software nor operating system detects the tape drive, or they do not
detect both the tape drive and the Autoloader or Library:
• Verify that all SAS cables are securely connected on both ends. If the mini‐SAS connectors
that connect to the tape drive and some HBAs will not plug in, check the key. The mini‐SAS
connector on the tape drive is keyed at location four, which is the standard location for end
devices. If the connector on the cable is keyed in a different location, not only will the
connector not plug in, but the cable probably will not work.
• Check the length and integrity of your SAS cabling. For reliable operation, do not use a SAS
cable longer than six meters. Do not use a cable adapter or converters between the HBA
and the Autoloader or Library.
• Check the SAS connectors for bent pins or debris.
• If the application software or operating system detects the tape drive, but not the Autoloader
or Library:
• Verify that multiple LUN support is enabled on the HBA. The device uses two Logical
Unit Numbers (LUNs) to control the tape drive (LUN 0) and robotic (LUN 1). The device
requires an HBA with multiple LUN support and multiple LUN support must be enabled
on the host computer. When multiple LUN support is not enabled, the host computer can
see the tape drive, but not the Autoloader or Library.
NOTE:
Many RAID or array controllers do not provide multiple LUN support.
• If the application software or operating system does not detect any devices on the HBA:
• Verify that the SAS host adapter is installed correctly. Refer to the manual that came with
your host adapter for installation and troubleshooting instructions. Pay particular attention
to any steps describing configuration settings. Make sure that the host adapter is properly
seated in the motherboard slot and the operating system correctly detects the host adapter.
• Verify that the proper device driver is installed for the SAS host adapter.
• If the Autoloader or Library is detected by the operating system, but not by the application
software:
• Refer to the documentation included with your backup application for instructions on
how to verify proper installation. Some backup software packages require an additional
module to communicate with the robotics.
• If the Autoloader or Library is detected by the operating system, but is listed as an unknown or
generic device:
• Make sure that the proper device driver, if applicable, is installed for the device. Check
your software provider’s website for the latest drivers and patches.
NOTE:
Many backup applications use their own drivers. Before installing a driver, make sure it is
not in conflict with the application software.
If you continue to have problems with a SAS Autoloader or Library, check the following:
• Ensure that the device is compatible with the SAS host adapter and backup application you
plan to use. For a list of compatible SAS host bus adapters and application software, check
with your SAS host adapter manufacturer and backup application vendor.
• Verify that your HBA is supported by the host computer and qualified with the Autoloader
or Library.
Fibre Channel connection problems
Use the Status screen to check the link connection for your tape drive.
134
Troubleshooting
If the screen shows Logged Out:
• Check that the Fibre speed is set to Automatic (on the RMI) or Auto Detect (on the OCP), or that
the correct fibre speed is selected. If you are unsure of the speed of the HBA or switch that the
Autoloader or Library is connected to, try Automatic (on the RMI) or Auto Detect (on the OCP).
• Check that the correct port type, fabric or loop, is selected. Loop requires additional configuration.
If you are unsure of the correct port type, try Automatic (on the RMI) or Auto Detect (on the OCP).
If the screen shows No Link, the Speed Status is – and the Link LED on the back of the drive is off:
• The speed is probably set incorrectly. Try setting the speed to Automatic (on the RMI interface)
or Auto Detect (on the OCP).
• If there are still issues, change the port type to Auto Detect.
If the screen shows No Light:
• The cable is not plugged in correctly. Check that it is connected correctly to Port A of the
tape drive.
• The cable is damaged. FC cables are delicate. If the cable has been bent or twisted sharply, it
may be broken and must be replaced.
If the screen shows ALPA Conflict:
• There might be a conflict with the ALPA address on Loop ports. Select Soft for the Loop mode
to allow the system to select an available address each time the tape drive connects to the FC
fabric. If your server configuration does not support changing addresses, try using the Hard
Auto‐Select option for the Loop mode. This allows the system to select an available address
when it first connects, and then retain that address for future connections.
Operation problems
Table 21 Power problems
Problem
Device does not power on.
Solution
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
No display messages appear.
All power supply LEDs are off
(SL48).
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Check all power cord connections.
Make sure the power button on the front panel has been pressed,
and the green READY LED is lit.
Make sure the outlet has power. Try another working outlet.
Replace the power cord.
Make sure the power cord is connected.
Make sure the power button on the front panel has been pressed,
and the green READY LED is lit.
Power cycle the device.
If the display is still blank but the Autoloader or Library seems
to be powered on, try to get the Autoloader or Library status or
error information from the RMI.
Check all power cord connections.
Make sure the power button on the front panel has been pressed,
and the green READY LED on the front panel is lit.
Make sure the outlet has power. Try another working outlet.
Replace the power cord.
Blue power supply LED is lit and
green power supply LED is off
(SL48).
The blue LED is lit when the power supply is plugged into a good
outlet. The green LED is lit when the power supply is producing
good power.
1. Replace the power supply.
Yellow power supply LED is lit
(SL48).
The yellow LED is lit when the power supply fan is not rotating at
an acceptable speed.
1. Check the power supply fan for obstructions.
2. Replace the power supply.
User and service guide
135
Table 22 Failure/attention indications displayed on the front panel
Problem
Solution
“!” in operator panel inventory
display.
Export the data cartridge marked with an ! in the inventory. The
cartridge is either damaged, incompatible with the drive, or the
wrong type for the attempted operation. For the SL24, see “Moving
tapes in the Autoloader (Operations > Move Tape)” on page 105 for
more information. For the SL48, see“Moving Media (Operations >
Move Media)” on page 118.
The LCD displays an error code.
Look up the error code, try to resolve the failure, and power cycle the
device (see “Error codes” on page 153). On the SL24 OCP, press Enter
to see the error message for the error code.
136
Troubleshooting
Table 23 Tape movement problems
Problem
Solution
Try the following steps, in this order, to remove the stuck tape.
NOTE:
The tape drive must rewind the tape before ejecting it. This
can take as long as five minutes, depending on how much tape
must be rewound. Once the tape is rewound, the eject cycle
will take fewer than 16 seconds.
The READY light flashes while the tape rewinds. Wait for the
tape to finish rewinding before attempting another operation.
1.
2.
Tape stuck in drive.
3.
4.
Attempt to unload the tape from your backup software.
Shut down the backup software and stop the operating system’s
removable storage services. From the OCP, attempt to unload
or move the tape to a slot. (For SL24, see “Moving tapes in the
Autoloader (Operations > Move Tape)” on page 105. For SL48,
see “Moving Media (Operations > Move Media)” on page 126).
Power down the unit, disconnect the cable from the drive, power
up the unit, and wait until the tape drive is idle or ready. From
the OCP, attempt to unload or move the tape to a slot.
From the OCP, attempt a force eject or emergency unload
operation. (For SL24, see “Forcing the drive to eject a tape
(Support > Force Drive To Eject Tape)” on page 111. For SL48, see
“Force ejecting a drive (Support > Force Drive Eject)” on page 129)
IMPORTANT:
Inspect the tape cartridge that was stuck. Damage or misplaced
labels on the cartridge could have caused the load/unload
failure. Discard any tape cartridge found to have issues.
Tape stuck in storage slot.
To remove a stuck tape from a storage slot:
If the operator control panel or the remote management interface
is still operational:
1. Move the tapes from the drives to the magazines using the Move
Tape command. (For SL24, see “Moving tapes in the Autoloader
(Operations > Move Tape)” on page 105. For SL48, see “Moving
Media (Operations > Move Media)” on page 126.)
2. Use the magazine removal process to release the magazine and
remove it from the device. To use the SL24 operator control
panel, see “Unlocking, removing, and replacing magazines
(Operations > Unlock Left or Right Magazine)” on page 104.
To use the SL48 operator control panel, see “Unlocking,
removing and replacing magazines (Operations > Unlock
Left/Right Magazines)” on page 126. To use the RMI, see
“Releasing and replacing the magazines” on page 81. If neither
one of these processes works, see “Releasing the magazines
manually” on page 150.
3. Manually remove the cartridge from the magazine by inserting a
finger in the hole at the back of the magazine. Some tapes need
to be inserted and removed several times to condition them for
free movement in and out of the magazine.
User and service guide
137
Table 24 Media problems
Problem
Solution
Cleaning or data cartridge
incompatible with drive.
Make sure you are using data and cleaning cartridges that
are compatible with the drive and model of your device (see
“Tape cartridges” on page 49) and that you are using the correct
cartridge type for the operation. The device automatically unloads
incompatible cartridges, the Attention LED flashes, and an
exclamation point (!) displays in the inventory display for the
indicated slot number. Export the media to clear the state.
Cannot write to or read from
tape.
• Make sure that the cartridge is not a WORM cartridge that has
already been used.
• Make sure that the cartridge is write enabled (move the
write‐protect switch to the enabled position).
• Make sure the data cartridge is compatible with the drive model.
LTO tape drives can read data cartridges from two generations
back and write to data cartridges one generation back. (See
“Backward read compatibility” on page 51.)
• Make sure you are using an Ultrium cartridge that has not been
degaussed. Do not degauss Ultrium cartridges!
• Make sure that the cartridge has not been exposed to harsh
environmental or electrical conditions and is not physically
damaged in any way.
• Many backup applications do not read or write to cartridges that
were created using a different backup application. In this case,
you may have to perform an erase, format, or label operation on
the cartridge.
• Make sure you understand any data protection or overwrite
protection schemes that your backup application may be using,
which could prevent you from writing to a given cartridge.
• Retry the operation with a different, known good tape.
• Clean the tape drive. (For SL24, see“Cleaning tape
drive” on page 85. For SL48, see “Cleaning the tape drive (Support
> Clean Drive)” on page 127.)
138
Troubleshooting
Table 25 Parallel SCSI device not detected
Problem
Solution
Device not detected
• Check that the HBA supports multiple LUNs and this feature is
enabled. If not, only the tape drive will be detected.
• Check for conflicting SCSI IDs.
• Power on the device before powering on the host computer.
• Make sure the Autoloader or Library does not have the drive off
line and that the Autoloader or Library is not running a test.
• Attach the device to an LVDS SCSI host adapter/bus.
• The parallel SCSI cable length might be too long. Use a shorter
cable or remove other devices from the bus.
• Parallel SCSI bus not properly terminated. See “SCSI detection
problems” on page 131.
• Check that the device is fully powered up and is not in an error
state.
• Check the parallel SCSI connector and terminator for bent pins.
See “SCSI detection problems” on page 131 for more detailed
troubleshooting help.
Changed drive SCSI ID, but the
host server does not recognize
the new ID.
• Make sure that all parallel SCSI devices on the same bus have
unique SCSI ID numbers.
• Only SCSI IDs 0 through 7 are available on a narrow (50 pin) bus.
If the Autoloader or Library is on a narrow bus and has a SCSI ID
of 8 or greater, the host server will not detect the drive. If you
must use SCSI IDs 8 or greater, use a wider bus.
• Reboot the host server.
User and service guide
139
Table 26 Attention LED is lit
Problem
Solution
Both the Attention and Cleaning
LEDs are lit.
This is most likely caused by a dirty drive that cannot read a tape
and marks the tape invalid.
1. View the inventory with the RMI. Note the slots that have tapes
marked with !.
2. Remove any magazines that contain tapes marked with !.
3. Remove the tapes that were marked with !.
4. Inspect each removed tape for damage, check that the tape is
compatible with the drive, and ensure that it is not past its usage
life. See “Tape cartridges” on page 49. Discard any tapes that are
damaged or past their usage life. Do not use cartridges that are
incompatible with the tape drive.
5. Reload the magazines with tapes that have passed inspection
and new tapes to replace cartridges that did not pass inspection.
6. Replace the magazines.
7. Clean the tape drive.
A particular cartridge sets off the
cleaning light.
Check the cartridge for contamination by loose debris.
A cartridge recently imported
from a different environment is
causing issues.
Media that is moved from one environment to another can
cause issues until it has acclimated to the new conditions. A
cartridge should be acclimated for at least 24 hours before being
used, particularly if it has been stored at a substantially different
temperature or level of humidity than the device.
The Attention LED is lit but the
Cleaning LED is not lit after a
cartridge load.
The Autoloader or Library was unable to complete the requested
operation with the selected tape cartridge.
• Use only cartridges that are compatible with the drive type (see
“Tape cartridges” on page 49).
• Use the correct type of cartridges for the operation. For example,
use a cleaning cartridge for cleaning.
• Make sure you are using an Ultrium Universal cleaning cartridge
(see “Tape cartridges” on page 49).
The Cleaning LED is lit after
using a cleaning cartridge.
The cleaning cartridge is expired. A cleaning cartridge will expire
after 50 cleaning cycles.
A particular cartridge sets off the
Attention LED and possibly the
Cleaning LED.
If the Media Attention LED is cleared and the drive has been cleaned,
and then immediately re‐displays each time a particular cartridge is
reloaded, that cartridge should be suspected as being defective.
• If this occurs, export the cartridge and load a known good
cartridge. In some cases, a cartridge can be worn out, have
a defective Cartridge Memory, or have been formatted as a
Firmware Upgrade Cartridge.
• Any cartridge that is suspected of being defective or contaminated
should NOT be reused in any drive.
• If the bad cartridge is a cleaning cartridge, it might be expired.
140
Troubleshooting
Table 27 Inventory problems
Problem
Solution
The inventory labels the cartridge
Full instead of showing its bar
code
• Verify that the label is properly applied. See “Labeling and
loading the tape cartridges” on page 46.
• Verify that the label is not soiled.
The inventory process takes a
long time
Apply high‐quality labels to all tape cartridges. During the inventory
process, the bar code reader attempts to read the bar code on the
cartridge or the bar code on the back of the storage slot until it
identifies the cartridge or determines that the slot is empty. The
reader can usually identify a properly‐labeled cartridge the first time,
while determining that an unlabeled cartridge is in a storage slot
can take four times as long.
Table 28 RMI network connection issues
Problem
Solution
Cannot connect to the remote
management interface (RMI)
• Verify that the device is connected to the LAN with a CAT 5, 6, or
6E Ethernet cable.
• Verify that the link LED on the RJ45 (LAN) connector is lit when
the device is powered up. If the LED is not lit, the device is not
communicating with the LAN. See your network administrator
for help.
• Verify that the device has been configured with a valid static
network address or DHCP has been enabled so the device can
obtain a network address. If using DHCP, write down the device’s
network address from the OCP Information menu. If the device
did not obtain a valid address via DHCP, verify that the DHCP
server is up and the device has network access to it. If necessary,
set a static network address instead.
• Enter the device’s IP address into the address bar of a web browser
connected to the same LAN as the device. If the RMI web page
does not display, ping the device’s IP address. If the ping fails,
verify that the device has a valid network address and that there
are no firewalls or other obstructions to network traffic between
the computer with the web browser and the device. See your
network administrator for help.
Table 29 Cleaning problems
Problem
Solution
Cannot load the cleaning
cartridge.
• Make sure you are using an Ultrium Universal cleaning cartridge
(see “Tape cartridges” on page 49).
• Make sure the cleaning cartridge has not expired. A cleaning
cartridge will expire after 50 cleaning cycles.
• Contact your service representative.
Performance problems
The process of backing up files goes through many devices, from the files in the file system on the disk,
through the backup server, and out to the Autoloader or Library, all managed by software running on
an operating system. The backup process can only run as fast of the slowest link in this chain.
To find the performance bottlenecks in your system, check the specifications and performance of the:
•
•
•
•
“Average file size” on page 142
“File system type” on page 142
“Connection from the host server to the disks” on page 143
“Operating system configuration” on page 145
User and service guide
141
•
•
•
•
“Backup server” on page 147
“Backup type” on page 147
“Connection from the host server to the device” on page 148
“Media” on page 150
Average file size
The hard drive must seek to the position of a file before it can start reading. The more time the disks
are seeking to files, the lower the performance.
To determine the average file size, divide the size of the backup by the number of files. See the
performance impact of your system’s average file size in Table 30.
Table 30 Performance impact of various file sizes
Average file size
Performance impact
Recommendations
<64 k: small files
POOR. Lots of small files require the
disk to perform many random accesses
instead of a continuous read.
• If possible, do NOT use a file‐by‐file
backup method.
• For backups with an average file
size <64 k, Sun recommends using a
sequential/image backup that backs
up the hard drive or LUN image
instead of the individual files.
The drawback with the
sequential/image backup method
is that you might only be able to
restore the entire disk image and not
individual files. If you can restore
individual files, the restore operation
will be very slow.
64 k – 1 mb: medium
files
NEUTRAL. Performance accessing
medium‐sized files should be okay.
The disks will still need to do a fair
number of random accesses.
No change is necessary but using a
sequential backup method, such as
an image backup, could offer some
performance gains. See above for
drawbacks.
>1 mb: large files
GOOD. Large files let the disk do less
seeking and spend more time doing
continuous reads.
None.
Image or sequential
backup
None. File size is irrelevant for Image
or sequential backups.
None.
File system type
The file system determines the organization of the files on the disks. When the files are spread over
multiple disks with multiple controllers, some disks can be seeking while others are reading. Find
the performance impact of your system’s file system in Table 31
142
Troubleshooting
Table 31 Performance impact of various file systems
File system
Performance impact
Recommendations
Disk array
GOOD. Disk arrays typically
provide excellent access to data.
They usually include many disks,
which improves bandwidth.
None.
VARIABLE. RAID uses a group
of disks to improve performance,
and in the case of RAID 5, provides
some parity protection in case one
of the drives fail.
To improve performance on a disk system,
you can use faster disks or add disks. For
good performance, each disk should have
a sustained read speed of greater than 6
MB/s and there should be one disk per 4
MB/s of native transfer for each tape drive.
The recommended number of disks per
LTO tape drive is:
• LTO‐2 HH: 6
• LTO‐3 HH: 15
• LTO‐3 FH: 20
• LTO‐4 HH: 20
• LTO‐4 FH: 30
Also, make sure that the server or
workstation is used as little as possible
during the backup, and close down
programs such as virus scanners, which
check each file that is opened.
POOR. A single disk cannot
retrieve or write data fast enough
for any of the supported tape
drives.
Upgrade to a disk array or RAID 5 with
the minimum number of disks needed
for your tape drives, or use concurrency
or multithreading in the backup software
to pull from more than one disk at a
time. The drawback with concurrency or
multithreading is that it slows the restore
operation.
Also, make sure that the server or
workstation is used as little as possible
during the backup, and close down
programs such as virus scanners, which
check each file that is opened.
Server or workstation
with RAID
Server or workstation
with a single disk
(spindle)
Connection from the host server to the disks
The connection between the host server and the disks determines how much data can be transferred
from the disks to the host computer at a time. A connection with insufficient bandwidth cannot
provide enough data for the tape drives to write at full speed. Find the performance impact of your
system’s disk connection in Table 32.
Table 32 Performance impact of various disk connections
Connection type
Performance impact
Recommendations
Fibre: 1 GB
• LTO‐2: GOOD. When fully used, a 1 GB fibre
connection can provide enough bandwidth
for two LTO‐2 tape drives.
• LTO‐3, LTO‐4: POOR. A 1 GB fibre
connection is inadequate for an LTO‐3 or
LTO‐4 tape drive.
For good performance, use a
faster connection with LTO‐3
and LTO‐4 tape drives.
User and service guide
143
Connection type
Performance impact
Recommendations
Fibre: 2 GB
GOOD. When fully used, a 2 GB fibre connection
can provide enough bandwidth for the following
number of tape drives:
• LTO‐2 HH: GOOD. When fully used, a 2
GB fibre connection can provide enough
bandwidth for 4 LTO‐2 HH tape drives.
• LTO‐3: GOOD. When fully used, a 2 GB fibre
connection can provide enough bandwidth
for an LTO‐3 tape drive.
• LTO‐4 HH: GOOD. When fully used, a 2
GB fibre connection can provide enough
bandwidth for an LTO‐4 HH tape drive.
• LTO‐4 FH: NEUTRAL. A fully used 2
GB fibre connection can provide enough
bandwidth for many data sets but is not
enough for 2:1 compressible data.
For good performance, use a
faster connection if you have
multiple LTO‐3 or LTO‐4 tape
drives.
Fibre: 4 GB
GOOD. When fully used, a 4 GB fibre connection
can provide enough bandwidth for the following
number of tape drives:
• LTO‐2 HH: 8
• LTO‐3 HH: 2
• LTO‐3 FH: 2
• LTO‐4 HH: 2
• LTO‐4 FH: 1
Parallel SCSI: Ultra
320
• LTO‐2 HH: GOOD. When fully used and
assuming that the connection to the disks
does not force the speed to a lower parallel
SCSI type, an Ultra 320 connection can
provide enough bandwidth for five LTO‐2
HH tape drives.
• LTO‐3: GOOD. When fully used and
assuming that the connection to the disks
does not force the speed to a lower parallel
SCSI type, an Ultra 320 connection ban
provide enough bandwidth for a single
LTO‐3 tape drive.
• LTO‐4 HH: GOOD. When fully used and
assuming that the connection to the disks
does not force the speed to a lower parallel
SCSI type, an Ultra 320 connection can
provide enough bandwidth for a single
LTO‐4 HH tape drive.
• LTO‐4 FH: NEUTRAL. When fully used,
an Ultra 320 connection provides enough
bandwidth for a single LTO‐4 FH tape drive.
144
Troubleshooting
If cables not designed for Ultra
320 speeds are used or there are
more than a couple devices on
the bus, the bus may slow down
to Ultra 160 speeds.
Connection type
Performance impact
Recommendations
LTO‐2 HH: GOOD. When fully used and
assuming that the connection to the disks
does not force the speed to a lower parallel
SCSI type, an Ultra 160 connection can
provide enough bandwidth for two LTO‐2
HH tape drives.
LTO‐3: MARGINAL. An Ultra 160
connection is barely adequate for an LTO‐3
tape drive. The bus would be saturated when
providing 2:1 compressible data to an LTO‐3
tape drive.
LTO‐4 HH: MARGINAL. An Ultra 160
connection is barely adequate for an LTO‐4
HH tape drive. The bus would be saturated
when providing 2:1 compressible data to an
LTO‐4 HH tape drive.
LTO‐4 FH: POOR. An Ultra 160 connection
is barely adequate for streaming an LTO‐4
FH tape drive with uncompressible data and
will not sustain maximum data rates with
compressible data.
Upgrade to Ultra 320 for parallel
SCSI disk drives when using
an LTO‐3 or LTO‐4 tape drive,
especially if your data is greater
than 2:1 compressible.
Parallel SCSI: Ultra
2 (80)
• LTO‐2 HH: MARGINAL. When fully used
and assuming that the connection to the disks
does not force the speed to a lower parallel
SCSI type, an Ultra 2 (80) connection barely
provides enough bandwidth for an LTO‐2
HH tape drive.
• LTO‐3, LTO‐4: POOR. An Ultra 2(80)
connection is inadequate for an LTO‐3 or
LTO‐4 tape drive.
Upgrade to Ultra 320 for parallel
SCSI disk drives when using an
LTO‐3 or LTO‐4 tape drive.
Parallel SCSI: Ultra
Wide, Fast Wide
POOR. Ultra Wide and Fast Wide are inadequate
transport mechanism for LTO tape drives.
Upgrade to a faster transport
medium, such as Ultra 320 SCSI.
Ethernet: 1 Gigabit
• LTO‐2 HH: MARGINAL. A 1 Gigabit
Ethernet connection barely provides enough
bandwidth for an LTO‐2 HH tape drive
when two concurrent streams are used. The
drawback of using concurrency is that restore
operations take longer.
• LTO‐3, LTO‐4: POOR. A 1 Gigabit Ethernet
connection is inadequate for an LTO‐3 or
LTO‐4 tape drive.
Upgrade to Fibre Channel if
using LTO‐3 or LTO‐4 tape
drives.
Ethernet: 100 Base
T, 10 Base T
POOR. 100 Base T and 10 Base T Ethernet do not
have enough bandwidth to support any of the
drives and would require too many streams to
make concurrency practical.
Upgrade to Gigabit Ethernet or
Fibre Channel.
Internal disks on
backup server
POOR. Add‐in RAID controllers, RAID on
a chip (ROC), RAID on the mother board
(ROMB), internal parallel SCSI, and internal
IDE (non‐RAID) are inadequate transport
mechanisms for LTO tape drives.
Use a dedicated disk array or
upgrade to RAID 5.
•
•
Parallel SCSI: Ultra
160
•
•
Operating system configuration
The operating system configuration and other programs running on the host computer can impact the
ability of the host computer to transfer files from the disks to the tape drive.
User and service guide
145
Windows
To improve backup performance and improve SAN stability, shutdown and disable the Windows
Removable Storage Manager unless the backup software requires it:
1.
From the Windows start menu, select Control Panel.
2.
In the Control Panel, select Administrative Tools.
3.
In the Administrative Tools, select Services.
4.
In Services, right‐click Removable Storage and select Stop. The Status should be blank as
shown in Figure 85.
Figure 85 Removable Storage service
5.
Right‐click Removable Storage again and select Properties.
6.
Change the Startup type to Disabled and click OK.
Stop as many programs as possible while a backup or restore is in progress. Be especially aware of
monitoring applications, such as anti‐virus software, which check every file that is read. If you are
concerned about viruses and backup performance, perform a virus scan before starting the backup,
and shut down the anti‐virus software while the backup is running.
Novell
You might need to tweak some Novell operating system parameters to achieve good backup
performance.
• The MAXIMUM PACKET RECEIVE BUFFERS and MINIMUM PACKET RECEIVE BUFFERS
parameters may need to be increased (if currently maxed out, try setting the MINIMUM to
the current MAXIMUM and then double the value for the MAXIMUM on the backup server
and any remote servers that are backed up).
• The MAXIMUM DIRECTORY CACHE BUFFERS and MINIMUM DIRECTORY CACHE
BUFFERS parameters may need to be increased (if currently maxed out, try setting the
MINIMUM to the current MAXIMUM and then double the value for the MAXIMUM on the
backup server and any remote servers that are backed up.)
• Set TCP DELAYED ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS to OFF.
• Since Novell volumes may be compressed, hardware compression may lower the performance
and capacity. If the volumes are compressed, make sure that the backup software does not
uncompress the data on read and has hardware and software compression disabled.
146
Troubleshooting
NOTE:
Disabling the hardware compression should not be necessary on LTO drives as they sense the
compression ratios and can automatically adjust if they receive non‐compressable data.
• Stop as many programs as possible while a backup or restore is in progress. Be especially
aware of monitoring applications, such as anti‐virus software, which check every file that is
read. If you are concerned about viruses and backup performance, perform a virus scan before
starting the backup, and shut down the anti‐virus software while the backup is running.
Backup server
The backup server must have enough RAM and processor power to transfer the files from the disk to
the tape drive. See Table 33 for the minimum RAM and CPU speed needed for each tape drive. In
some cases, a multi‐processor server may be required.
NOTE:
Processor speed numbers as based on Intel x86 type processors. Use the equivalent on a RISC
or other type of processor.
Table 33 Backup server requirements
Tape drive
Minimum RAM/drive
Processor power/drive
LTO‐2 HH
512 MB
1 GHz
LTO‐3 HH
1 GB
2 GHz
LTO‐3 FH, LTO‐4 HH
1 GB
2 GHz
LTO‐4 FH
2 GB
3 GHz
In addition to having enough RAM and processing power, ensure that the PCI bus is at least 64 bit,
has a speed of 66 MHz or better, and is not overloaded by too many high‐bandwidth cards. PCI‐X is
preferred.
Backup type
Each type of backup has its own impact on performance, depending on how well it can keep data
streaming to the tape drive.
File‐by‐file with a full‐featured backup application
Performance impact: VARIABLE.
File‐by‐file backup with a full‐featured backup application can be fast enough if the average file size is
at least 64 k and there are not too many fragmented files. Full‐featured backup applications also offer
the best speeds for single file restores and allows for backing up only specific data.
If the average file size is less than 64 k or if the file system is very fragmented, file‐by‐file backup
will have poor performance. If the file system has a lot of fragmentation, use a de‐fragmentation
utility to make the files contiguous again. If the average file size is less than 64 k, Sun recommends
that you use a sequential/image backup that backups up the hard drive or LUN image instead of
the individual files. The drawback with sequential/image backups is that they may only be able to
restore the entire disk image and not individual files. If they can restore individual files, the restore
operation will be very slow.
User and service guide
147
File‐by‐file with a native application
Performance impact: POOR.
Native backup applications based on tar, cpio, NT Backup, etc. do not have the extra features needed
to manage the bandwidth requirements of the faster tape drives and should only be used to test
basic functionality.
To get the best backup and restore performance, use a full‐featured backup application. If the
average file size is less than 64 k, use a sequential/image backup for best performance. However, a
sequential/disk image backup might not allow you to restore individual files or the restore process
will be very slow.
Disk image, flash, or sequential
Performance impact: GOOD.
A disk image or sequential backup backs up an entire disk, partition, or LUN by looking at the disk
sector by sector instead of file by file. The entire disk contents is backed up contiguously, without the
disk seeking, which prevents performance degradation caused by small or fragmented files.
If you are more concerned about backup performance than single‐file restore, disk image or sequential
backups can offer a real performance benefit. The disadvantage is that backup and restore operations
work on an entire disk, partition, or LUN. You might not be able to backup a subset of files or restore a
single file. If you can restore a single file, the restore process will be slow.
Database backup
Performance impact: VARIABLE.
To improve performance when backing up data from a database:
• Use specific backup agents for the database.
• Use the latest versions of the databases.
• Do not backup individual mailboxes.
• Do not backup specific records or do a record‐by‐record backup.
• Do not backup when the database is in heavy use.
Connection from the host server to the Autoloader or Library
For the best performance, the connection from the host server to the Autoloader or Library must have
enough bandwidth to provide enough data to keep the tape drive streaming.
NOTE:
Unlike most tape technologies, an LTO tape drive can write data as fast as the server can send it,
even if the tape drive is not streaming.
Find the performance impact of your system’s Autoloader or Library connection in Table 34
148
Troubleshooting
Table 34 Performance impact of various Autoloader or Library connections
Connection type
Performance impact
Recommendations
Ultra 320 is an excellent transport
medium, but only has enough
bandwidth for one LTO‐3 or LTO‐4
drive per bus.
Parallel SCSI: Ultra 320
GOOD. When fully used, an Ultra 320
SCSI connection can provide enough
bandwidth for the following number of
tape drives, assuming 2:1 compression:
• LTO‐2: 2
• LTO‐3, LTO‐4: 1
Parallel SCSI: Ultra 160
• LTO‐2: GOOD. When fully used
and assuming that the connection
to the disks does not force the speed
to a lower parallel SCSI type, an
Ultra 160 connection can provide
enough bandwidth for two LTO‐2
tape drives.
• LTO‐3: MARGINAL. An Ultra 160
connection is barely adequate for an
LTO‐3 tape drive. The bus would
be saturated with 2:1 compressible
data.
• LTO‐4: POOR. An LTO‐4
tape drive is unable to sustain
maximum transfer speeds with 2:1
compressible data.
Ultra 160 is a good transport medium,
but does not have enough bandwidth
for LTO‐3 or LTO‐4 tape drives. If
using LTO‐3 or LTO‐4, upgrade to an
Ultra 320 HBA, especially if you have
greater than 2:1 compressible data.
Parallel SCSI: Ultra 2
(80)
• LTO‐2: MARGINAL. Ultra 2 (80)
barely has enough bandwidth for
one LTO‐2 drive.
• LTO‐3, LTO‐4: POOR. An Ultra 2
(80) connection is inadequate for an
LTO‐3 or LTO‐4 tape drive.
Upgrade to Ultra 320.
Parallel SCSI: Ultra
Wide, Fast Wide
Ultra Wide and Fast Wide are
inadequate for all of the currently
supported tape drives.
Upgrade to Ultra 320.
Fibre Channel: 1 GB
• LTO‐3, LTO‐4: POOR. One gigabit
fibre is inadequate for an LTO‐3 or
LTO‐4 tape drive.
For LTO‐3 tape drives, upgrade to 2
or 4 GB Fibre Channel. For LTO‐4
tape drives, upgrade to 4 GB Fibre
Channel.
Fibre Channel: 2 GB
• LTO‐3: GOOD. When fully used,
2 GB Fibre Channel has plenty of
bandwidth for an LTO‐3 tape drive.
• LTO‐4: MARGINAL. An LTO‐4
tape drive is unable to sustain
maximum transfer speeds with 2:1
compressible data.
For LTO‐4 tape drives, upgrade to 4
GB Fibre Channel.
Fibre Channel: 4 GB
GOOD. When fully used, 4 GB Fibre
Channel has plenty of bandwidth for
all supported tape drives.
NOTE:
If the parallel SCSI cables are not
designed for Ultra 320 speeds or
more than a couple devices are on
the parallel SCSI bus, the bus may
slow down to Ultra 160 speed.
User and service guide
149
Media
Once the data gets to the tape drive, it must be written onto the tape. If there are no bottlenecks
and the Autoloader or Library starts having performance problems:
• Try a new cartridge. A marginal cartridge can cause performance problems when the tape
drive has to retry writing to bad spots on the tape.
• Clean the tape drive. See “Tape cartridges” on page 49 for instructions.
Service and repair
Releasing the magazines manually
If you cannot remove the magazines via the OCP or RMI, do the following:
1.
Unplug the power cord from the device.
2.
From the back of the device, find the access holes for the right and left magazines. See Figure 86.
1
2
10863
Figure 86 Access holes for the right and left magazines
150
1.
Right magazine release
2.
Left magazine release
Troubleshooting
3.
To manually release a magazine, push the end of a small metal pin or straightened paper clip into
the magazine access hole at the back of the device. While holding the paper clip, have a second
person attempt to pull the magazine out of the front of the unit. For the SL48, all magazines on a
side are released and should be removed at the same time. See Figure 87.
2
1
11342
Figure 87 Releasing the magazine
1.
Push a paper clip into the access hole.
2.
Pull the magazine out of the front of the unit.
4.
Repeat step 3 for the other magazine if necessary.
5.
If other tapes are still in the device, or if you were unable to manually remove the magazines and
drive, contact Sun customer service for further instructions.
The wellness test
The wellness test exercises all Autoloader or Library and tape drive hardware, except the external
connections, and is useful for verifying that a device is working correctly. The wellness test requires
operator interaction with the mailslot so cannot be initiated from the RMI.
For complete testing, enable the mailslot and ensure that each top‐row corner slot contains a tape
cartridge.
User and service guide
151
Table 35 Top‐row corner slot positions
12
11
10
9
7
6
5
8
4
3
2
1
2U top‐row corner
slots with mailslot
disabled: 9, 12, 21, 24
24
23
20
22
19
16
21
18
15
17
14
13
11896
24
23
22
21
19
18
17
20
16
15
14
12
13
11
10
9
7
6
5
8
4
3
2
1
4U top‐row corner
slots with mailslot
disabled: 21, 24, 45,
48
48
47
44
40
46
43
39
45
42
38
36
41
37
35
32
28
34
31
27
33
30
26
29
25
11407
IMPORTANT:
The Autoloader or Library will remove any tape cartridges from the tape drives and go offline
when running the wellness test. Verify that any applications using the Autoloader or Library have
completed before starting the wellness test.
You can have the Autoloader or Library run up to 10 cycles of the wellness test. If the Autoloader or
Library has more than one tape drive installed, you can select whether to run the test on one or all of
the tape drives. The wellness test operates on the whole Autoloader or Library, without regard to
logical libraries.
The wellness test requires operator interaction and can only be run from the OCP. During the wellness
test:
152
Troubleshooting
1.
The operator starts the wellness test from the OCP. The administrator password is required.
2.
The Autoloader or Library performs a self test and verifies that it can communicate with the
tape drive.
3.
The Autoloader or Library returns any tape cartridges from the tape drives to their home slots. If
the home slot for a cartridge is not known, the Autoloader or Library will move the cartridge to
the mailslot and prompt the operator to remove it.
4.
The Autoloader or Library prompts the operator to enter the number of cycles to run the test.
5.
The Autoloader or Library opens the mailslot and prompts the operator to insert a scratch
cartridge.
6.
The operator inserts a scratch cartridge into the lowest‐numbered mailslot. If no mailslots are
enabled or the operator closes the mailslot without inserting a cartridge into the lowest‐numbered
mailslot, the Autoloader or Library will perform a shortened version of the wellness test, skipping
step 7.
7.
The Autoloader or Library loads the scratch cartridge into the first tape drive, unloads the scratch
cartridge from the tape drive, and returns the scratch cartridge to the mailslot. If the operator
selected to test all of the tape drives, the Autoloader or Library will load the scratch cartridge into
each tape drive before returning it to the mailslot.
8.
The Autoloader or Library moves the tape cartridge from the four top‐row corner slots to the tape
drive load point and then returns the tape cartridge to its slot. If one of the top‐row corner slot
positions does not contain a tape cartridge, the Autoloader or Library will skip that location. If
none of the top‐row corner slots contain a tape cartridge, the Autoloader or Library displays an
error message.
9.
If additional cycles remain to be run, the test will return to step 7 if there is a tape cartridge in
the mailslot or step 8 if there is not a cartridge in the mailslot.
10. At the conclusion of the test, the Autoloader or Library pops open the mailslot and waits for the
operator to remove the scratch tape.
11. The Autoloader or Library displays the test completion status, including any recoveries or errors
that may have occurred.
Error codes
If an error occurs during operation, the device stops the current operation and displays an error code
on the LCD screen. Unless otherwise noted in “Operation problems” on page 135, record the error
code or error message from the LCD screen, and then try to resolve the error by cycling power to
the device and retrying the operation.
NOTE:
You may need to cycle power on the Autoloader or Library to clear the Error LED.
To check the overall operation of the device, run the wellness test from the RMI or
OCP. The wellness test exercises all robotic movements and checks the status of the
electrical components and communication. To run the wellness test from the RMI, see
“Performing general diagnostics” on page 82. To run the wellness test from the SL24 OCP, see
“Running the wellness test (Support > Run Wellness Test)” on page 108. To run the wellness test from
the SL48 OCP, see “Running tests (Support > Run Tests)” on page 128.
If the error persists, contact support personnel.
There are two ways to obtain error codes from the device:
• On the SL24 OCP or the SL48 OCP
• On the RMI
User and service guide
153
Finding error code information on the SL24 OCP
When an error first occurs, the error message and error code are displayed on the OCP, as shown in
Figure 88.
Figure 88 Initial OCP error message
The code 9B is the main error code, and 37 is the error sub‐code.
If you review the Error Log in the Support menu, the OCP error log displays the error code, as shown
in Figure 89.
Figure 89 Error code in the OCP Error Log
The code 9B is the main error code, 37 is the error sub‐code, and 31 is sub‐code specific information for
factory use only. When you press Enter, the OCP displays the error message, as shown in Figure 90.
Figure 90 Error message in the OCP Error Log
If you press Next, the OCP will display additional information, if available, as shown in Figure 91.
Figure 91 No additional information in the OCP error log
If you press Next again, the OCP will display the date and time in the format: YYYY‐MM‐DD
followed by the time in 24–hour clock format, where 1:00 pm is 13:00, as shown in Figure 92.
Figure 92 Date and time in the OCP error log
Finding error code information on the SL48 OCP
Error codes are displayed in pop‐up messages when an error occurs during an operation that is
initiated from the operator control panel.
The message shows the error code and a description of the error.
For example:
8D 52
Mechanical Block
nl
where:
154
Troubleshooting
8D is the main error code
52 is the error sub‐code.
nl
The error log contains a list of all errors, with a separate row for each error. The log shows the
Date/Time, Code, and Description.
For example,
24/06/05 01:48
D7 50
System Error
where:
24/06/05 is the date in the format DD‐MM‐YY
01:48 is the time in 24–hour format. For example, 1:00 pm is 13:00.
D7 is the main error code
50 is the error sub‐code
nl
nl
nl
Finding error code information on the RMI
You can find error codes on the RMI Support: Library Logs page. The available logs are: Error Trace,
Informational Trace, Warning Trace, Configuration Change Trace, and Standard Trace.
The log entries are displayed in order of most recent to oldest. The format for the log entries is:
YY.MM.DD HH.MM.SS.ss LIB/ERR<80 89 62 40
nl
• YY.MM.DD — the date displayed as Year.Month.Day
• HH.MM.SS.ss — the time displayed as Hour.Minute.Second.Hundredths fo a second
• First code — hard or soft error. The code after LIB/ERR (80 in the example) will be 80 or 40. 80
indicates a hard error, 40 indicates a soft error.
• Second code — the main error code (89 in this example). See “Error codes” on page 153 for a
list of error codes and recovery procedures.
• Third code — the sub‐code (62 in this example). See “Error sub‐codes” on page 164 for
a list of sub‐codes.
• Fourth code — sub‐code‐specific information for factory use only
User and service guide
155
Figure 93 Support: Library Logs page
Main error code descriptions
Table 36 Main error codes
Error code
80
Cannot initialize bar code reader
81
No response from bar code reader
82
No response from EEPROM on robotic
controller
83
Robotic controller generic problem
84
Setting of gripper1 motor parameters
failed
85
Setting of slider2 motor parameters failed
86
Setting of elevator3 motor parameters
failed
87
Setting of rotation4 motor parameters
failed
88
Setting of sled5 motor parameters failed
Details and solution
Power‐cycle the unit and retry the
operation
Gripper1 obstructed
• Run the wellness test.
• Ensure that nothing is obstructing the
gripper.
• If the device was moved, verify that
each of the tape cartridges is properly
seated in a magazine.
8A
Slider2 obstructed
• Run the wellness test.
• If this error occurs with sub‐code
43, a magazine could be misaligned.
Remove the magazines, re‐seat them,
and try again.
• Verify that nothing is obstructing the
robot.
8B
Elevator3 obstructed
Run the wellness test
89
156
Description
Troubleshooting
Description
Details and solution
Rotation4 obstructed
• Run the wellness test.
• Ensure that there is nothing
obstructing the gripper.
• If the device was moved, verify that
each of the tape cartridges is properly
seated in a magazine or drive.
8D
Sled5 obstructed
• If this error occurs on the first
power‐on after unpacking or moving
the device, or after replacing the
chassis, ensure that the shipping lock
was removed from the top and stored
on the back panel (see “Removing the
shipping lock” on page 36).
• If the device was moved or shipped
with tape cartridges in the magazines,
verify that the cartridges did not come
out of the magazines to obstruct the
drive.
• Ensure that nothing is stacked on top
of the device because any weight on
top of the device can bow the top cover
down and interfere with the robotics.
• Ensure that the device is either
mounted in a rack with its rack kit or
in a tabletop conversion cover. The
device must be supported under both
of its side edges or the bottom can bow
and impede robotic movement.
• Run the wellness test.
8E
Ends of gripper1 movement not in
expected range
Run the wellness test
8F
Ends of slider2 movement not in expected
range
• Early firmware versions were not able
to use as much force to get or place
media in a magazine. Upgrading the
Library firmware might resolve this
issue.
• If the error consistently happens on the
same slot, try different tape cartridges
in that slot.
• If the failure remains with the same
slot, the magazine may be at fault.
• If the failure follows the tape
cartridge, the tape cartridge may
be at fault.
• If the device is performing an
operation that automatically returns a
tape cartridge to a certain slot, make
sure another tape is not loaded in that
slot.
• Run the wellness test
90
Ends of elevator3 movement not in
expected range
Run the wellness test
91
Ends of rotation4 movement not in
expected range
• Run the wellness test.
• Ensure that nothing is obstructing the
plunge in and out movement of the
robot.
Error code
8C
User and service guide
157
Error code
sled5
Details and solution
movement not in expected
92
Ends of
range
93
Gripper1 reached a position beyond
expected range
94
Slider2 reached a position beyond
expected range
95
Elevator3 reached a position beyond
expected range
96
Rotation4 reached a position beyond
expected range
97
Sled5 reached a position beyond expected
range
98
Cartridge present sensor not found
99
Slider2
9A
Rotation4 home sensor not found
9B
Sled5 position sensor not found
9C
Gripper1 range of motion out of
specification
9D
Slider2 range of motion out of specification
9E
Elevator3 range of motion out of
specification
9F
Rotation4 range of motion out of
specification
A0
Sled5 range of motion out of specification
Run the wellness test
home sensor not found
A1
Open Mailslot failed
• Retry the operation.
• Ensure that nothing is obstructing the
opening of the mailslot.
• Remove the magazine and check for
issues such as a tape label preventing
the mailslot from opening.
B0
Command from the autoloader or library
controller to robotics controller did not
complete in time allotted
• Reset the device and retry the
operation.
• If the problem continues, contact Sun
customer support.
B1
Robot controller reported format error
on command from Autoloader or Library
controller
• Reset the device and retry the
operation.
• Update the Autoloader or Library to
the latest version.
B2
Communication to robot from Autoloader
or Library controller failed
Run the wellness test.
Robot stopped due to a released magazine
• Check that all magazines are
completely inserted and retry the
operation.
• If this error was caused by a manual
magazine removal, replace the
magazine and try the operation again.
B3
158
Description
Troubleshooting
Description
Details and solution
“Tape in gripper1” sensor did not report
the expected value
• Remove the magazines and inspect
them for a stuck tape. If no tapes
are stuck in the magazines, shine a
light in one of the open magazine
bays to see if there is a tape in the
robot or drive. If there is a tape in
the robot, replace the magazines and
power‐cycle the device. If there is a
tape in a drive, replace the magazines
and run the Force Tape Eject operation.
(For SL24, see “Forcing the drive to
eject a tape (Support > Force Drive To
Eject Tape)” on page 111). For SL48,
see “Force ejecting a drive (Support >
Force Drive Eject)” on page 129.)
• Run the wellness test
Robotic controller not responding to
command from Autoloader or Library
controller
• Reset the device and retry the
operation.
• Update the firmware to the latest
version.
• If power‐cycling does not resolve the
issue, contact Sun customer support.
C0
Network initialization failed
• Check the network cable.
• Check that the network configuration
is correct.
• If DHCP is enabled, ensure that a
DHCP server is up an running on the
device’s network.
• Power cycle the device and try again.
C1
Telnet interface initialization failed
C2
Web server initialization failed
C6
Ping command did not reach target
C7
Cannot upgrade firmware from USB
• Retry the firmware upgrade. If not
successful, attempt a different upgrade
method, such as the RMI.
Cannot upgrade firmware from FTP
• Ensure that the correct file was
selected.
• Retry firmware upgrade.
• If not successful, attempt a different
firmware upgrade method.
Cannot upgrade robotic firmware from
USB.
• Retry firmware upgrade.
• If not successful, attempt a different
firmware upgrade method.
• If still not successful, contact Sun
customer support.
ROM checksum incorrect
• Retry Autoloader or Library firmware
upgrade.
• If the device continues to fail, contact
Sun customer support.
Error code
B4
B5
C8
C9
D0
• Check the network cable.
• Check that the network configuration
is correct.
• Power cycle the device and try again.
User and service guide
159
Error code
160
Description
Details and solution
D1
RAM error during Power‐On‐Self‐Test
D2
Read or Write to NVRAM on autoloader
or library controller failed
D3
Time controller failed during
Power‐On‐Self‐Test
D4
Internal UART serial communication
error
D5
Communication to display failed
D6
Autoloader or library controller memory
error
D7
Fatal system error
D8
Autoloader or library controller data base
error
D9
No SCSI IC detected
DA
When running the wellness test, the bar
code did not match the previous value for
that tape
• Check the bar code label for proper
application and damage.
• Run the wellness test again.
DB
External cooling fan error. The sub‐code
indicates the affected fan. Sub‐code 00:
drive sled5 #1. Sub‐code 01:drive sled5 #2.
Check if the fan is operational and not
obstructed
DC
I2C Bus failure.
• Power‐cycle the device.
• On the SL48, power down the Library
and re‐seat the library controller from
the back panel.
DD
Warning event. See DD in “Warning
events” on page 165.
DE
Warning event. See DE in “Warning
events” on page 165.
Power‐cycle the unit
E0
Incompatible magazine detected. The
mailslot was enabled with a different
mailslot magazine type than is currently
in the Autoloader or Library. For example,
the mailslot was enabled with a three‐slot
mailslot magazine and then the lower‐left
magazine was replaced with a one‐slot
mailslot magazine.
• Either replace the lower left magazine
with the original magazine, or
disable and re‐enable the mailslot to
reconfigure the Autoloader or Library
with the new mailslot configuration.
Note: You will need to reconfigure
your backup software.
• If the issue continues, inspect the
magazine for damage and missing
light pipes or magazine prism pieces
(clear plastic pieces in each slot).
E2
Unsupported hardware detected. Some
hardware that is connected to the
Autoloader or Library requires updated
Autoloader or Library firmware.
• Update the Autoloader or Library
firmware to the current version.
F0
Drive exceeded temperature specification
• Check ambient temperature to
ensure that it is within operating
specifications.
• Check all fans to determine whether
they are working properly.
F1
Autoloader or Library controller lost
communication with the drive
F2
Drive sled5 not present
Troubleshooting
• Power‐cycle the device and retry the
operation.
• Re‐seat the tape drive to ensure a good
connection to the device.
Description
Details and solution
Drive hardware error
• Cycle power, after several occurrences,
• Contact technical support
Time allotted for drive loading exceeded
• Check that the tape cartridge is
supported and has not exceeded its
usage life. Inspect it for damage.
• Retry the operation.
• Clean the drive. The error sub‐code 00
indicates drive 1, sub‐code 01 indicates
drive 2, and so on.
F5
Time allotted for drive unloading
exceeded
• Retry the operation.
• Attempt the Force Tape Eject process.
Once the tape cartridge is ejected,
unlock the magazine holding the
cartridge and inspect the cartridge for
damage. Discard the tape cartridge
if it is damaged. (For SL24, see
“Forcing the drive to eject a tape
(Support > Force Drive To Eject
Tape)” on page 111). For SL48, see
“Force ejecting a drive (Support >
Force Drive Eject)” on page 129.)
F6
No drive installed. A tape drive has never
been installed.
• Install at least one tape drive.
• If a tape drive is installed, re‐seat it by
removing it and replacing it.
Invalid drive command
• Update the tape drive firmware to the
current version.
• Try the operation again.
• If the error occurs again contact Sun
customer support.
Invalid drive parameter
• Update the tape drive firmware to the
current version.
• Try the operation again.
• If the error occurs again contact Sun
customer support.
SDCI microcode error
• Update the tape drive firmware to the
current version.
• Try the operation again.
• If the error occurs again contact Sun
customer support.
Drive logged out
• Update the tape drive firmware to the
current version.
• Try the operation again.
• If the error occurs again contact Sun
customer support.
Internal SCSI command failed with check
condition
• Update the tape drive firmware to the
current version.
• Try the operation again.
• If the error occurs again contact Sun
customer support.
Internal SCSI command timeout
• Update the tape drive firmware to the
current version.
• Try the operation again.
• If the error occurs again contact Sun
customer support.
Error code
F3
F4
F8
F9
FA
FB
FC
FD
User and service guide
161
1Gripper:
The part of the robotics assembly that pinches media in order to grip it.
The part of the robotics assembly that plunges in and out for get and put operations.
3Elevator: The part of the robotics assembly that moves in the vertical direction.
4Rotation: The part of the robotics assembly that turns the robot to face each magazine and the drive.
5Sled: The part of the robotics assembly that moves the robot towards the OCP or back towards
the drive.
nl
2Slider:
nl
nl
nl
nl
Error sub‐code descriptions
Robotic error sub‐codes
Table 37 Robotic error sub‐codes
Sub‐code
162
Description
01
Mechanical initialization failure
02
Connection to slave robotic failed
03
Error motor initialization
04
Error during gripper1 close
05
Error slider2 home positioning
06
Error elevator3 home movement
07
Error during sled5 movement to rotation4 position
08
Error during rotation4 initialization, get range failed
09
Error elevator3 init
0A
Error during rotation4 to far position
0B
Error first sled5 init, move to sensor failed
0C
Error during sled5 movement to rotation4 position
0D
Error during rotation4 to slide position
0E
Error slider2 init, get range failed
0F
Error during slider2 forward movement
10
Error gripper1 init, get range failed
11
Error during slider2 home movement
12
Error during rotation4 to FAR position
13
Error sled5 init, move to sensor failed
20
Error inventory scan
21
Error during gripper1 close
22
Error slider2 home movement
23
Error during move gripper1 to scan pos
24
Error reading bar code label
28
Error Extra inventory scan
29
Error during closing gripper1
2A
Error slider2 preposition movement
2B
Error during opening gripper1
2C
Error during sled5 movement up to sensor
Troubleshooting
Sub‐code
Description
2D
Error slider2 preposition backwards movement
30
Error slot preposition
31
Error during sled5 movement in FLMoveRotation
32
Command sending to robotic failed
33
Error during elevator3 movement in FLMoveRotation function
34
Error during rotation4 in FLMoveRotation function
35
Error during elevator3 movement in FLMoveRotation function
36
Error during sled5 movement in FLMoveSled function
37
Error during sled5 positioning to mailslot in FLMoveSled function
38
Error during sled5 positioning to mailslot in FLMoveSled function
39
Error during sled5 positioning without sensor
40
Movement to/from slot failed
41
Error during first slider2 movement
42
Error during first gripper1 movement
43
Error during second slider2 movement
44
Error during second gripper1 movement, get range failed
45
Error during third slider2 movement, move home failed
50
Preposition to drive failed
51
Elevator3 movement to home sensor failed
52
Sled5 movement to home sensor failed
53
Error during sled5 movement to drive position
54
Error during rotation4 to drive position
55
Error during elevator3 movement in drive position
56
Error during sled5 movement to rotation position.
57
Error during rotation to end position.
60
Move from/to drive failed
61
Error during first slider2 movement
62
Error during first gripper1 movement
63
Error during second slider2 movement
64
Error during second gripper1 movement, get range failed
65
Error during third slider2 movement, move home failed
70
Release magazine failed
71
Error during sled5 movement to rotation4 position
72
Error during rotation4 to unlock position
73
Error during move sled5 to block
80
Opening mailslot failed
81
Error during movement to mailslot open position
82
Error during moving back, sensor was found
90
Movement to home position failed
User and service guide
163
Sub‐code
Description
91
Elevator3 movement to home position failed
92
Error during sled5 movement to rotation4 position
93
Error during rotation4 to home or far position
94
Sled5 movement to home sensor position failed
95
Sled5 movement to transport position failed
A0
Movement to mailslot failed
A1
Sled5 movement to sensor failed
A2
Sled5 movement to rotation4 position failed
A3
Elevator3 movement to home position failed
A4
Error during rotation4 to far position
A5
Sled5 movement to mailslot position failed
B0
EEPROM on robotics controller not accessible or error during read/write operation
C0
Check on magazine type failed
C1
Rotation4 movement during check on magazine type failed
C2
Elevator3 movement during check on magazine type failed
C3
Sled5 movement during check on magazine type failed
C4
Sled5 movement to sensor during check on magazine type failed
1Gripper:
The part of the robotics assembly that pinches media in order to grip it.
The part of the robotics assembly that plunges in and out for get and put operations.
3Elevator: The part of the robotics assembly that moves in the vertical direction.
4Rotation: The part of the robotics assembly that turns the robot to face each magazine and the drive.
5Sled: The part of the robotics assembly that moves the robot towards the OCP or back towards
the drive.
nl
2Slider:
nl
nl
nl
nl
Device error sub‐codes
Table 38 Device error sub‐codes
Error code
164
Description
81
Drive wake up failed
88
Error accessing slot status
90
Robotic load not reached Cartridge Present sensor
91
No activity after Load command
92
Time‐out while loading tape
93
No activity after load command
94
Time‐out drive Unload
95
Drive terminated unsuccessfully
96
Tape not ejected at robot unload
97
Slot not free at robot unload
Troubleshooting
Drive error codes
Table 39 Drive error codes
Error code
Description
01
Drive broken
02
Temperature exceeds limit
03
Tape error
04
Cleaning cartridge is expired
05
Drive needs cleaning
06
Autoloader or Library lost communication with the drive
07
Warning that the tape is nearing its end of life
Warning events
Table 40 Warning event codes
Description
Details and Solution
50
Cartridge location in a different partition;
move across partition boundaries was
initiated.
The Autoloader or Library will not move
a cartridge from one logical library to
another logical library.
To move a cartridge from one logical
library to another:
1. Move the cartridge to the mailslot.
2. Remove the cartridge from the
mailslot.
3. Close the mailslot.
4. Replace the cartridge in the mailslot.
5. Move the cartridge to a slot in the new
logical library.
51
Incompatible medium
Verify that the cartridge and tape drive
generation are compatible. See “Backward
read compatibility” on page 51.
52
All slots full; no movement possible
Remove a cartridge from the Autoloader
or Library to make a slot available for the
move operation.
53
Wellness test: invalid test setup
Load tapes in the four top‐level corner
slots. See“The wellness test” on page 151.
58
Parity error
• Retry the operation.
• If the problem continues, contact Sun
customer support.
59
Error log overflow
• Retry the operation.
• If the problem continues, contact Sun
customer support.
60
Cleaning tape installed.
Complete the cleaning process and retry
the operation.
Cleaning failure. Cleaning process could
not be performed.
A data cartridge may have been loaded
instead of a cleaning cartridge.
• Check cleaning tape and exchange if
necessary.
• Retry the operation.
Event code
61
User and service guide
165
Description
Details and Solution
Cleaning tape expired.
Exchange the cleaning tape.
Invalid cartridge. Drive has rejected the
cartridge as invalid.
• Check the cartridge for damage. It
could be a defective cartridge.
• Make sure that the cartridge is
compatible with the drive. See “Tape
cartridges” on page 49.
• Verify that the cartridge is not a
firmware upgrade tape. Initiate the
firmware upgrade process before
loading a firmware upgrade tape into
the drive.
Invalid cleaning cartridge. Drive has
rejected the cartridge as invalid.
• Verify that the cartridge is a cleaning
cartridge.
• Check the cartridge for damage. It
could be a defective cartridge.
• Make sure that the cartridge is
compatible with the drive. See “Tape
cartridges” on page 49.
• Verify that the cartridge is not a
firmware upgrade tape. Initiate the
firmware upgrade process before
loading a firmware upgrade tape into
the drive.
65
Invalid upgrade cartridge. Drive has
rejected the cartridge as invalid.
• Verify that the cartridge is a firmware
upgrade cartridge, not a data or
cleaning cartridge.
• Check the cartridge for damage. It
could be a defective cartridge.
• Make sure that the cartridge is
compatible with the drive. See “Tape
cartridges” on page 49.
80
Movement retry. Robotics movement did
not succeed but was successful on a retry.
If this event becomes excessive, contact Sun
customer support.
Event code
62
63
64
81
Drive sled fan alert. Fan motion has
stopped.
• Check the tape drive fan on the
Autoloader or Library back panel to see
whether the fan is operational and not
obstructed.
• If this event continues, contact Sun
customer support.
NOTE:
The sub‐error code indicates the
affected tape drive. For example, 00 is
drive 1 and 01 is drive 2.
Clean the indicated tape drive.
NOTE:
82
83
166
Clean request from the tape drive
Media attention
Troubleshooting
The sub‐error code indicates the
affected tape drive. For example, 00 is
drive 1 and 01 is drive 2.
• Verify that the cartridge and tape drive
generation are compatible.
• Inspect the cartridge for damage.
• Ensure that the cartridge has not
exceeded its usage life.
• Retry the operation.
Description
Details and Solution
Tape drive tape alert; tape drive reported a
warning or critical tape alert.
• Verify that the cartridge and tape drive
generation are compatible.
• Inspect the cartridge for damage.
• Ensure that the cartridge has not
exceeded its usage life.
• Retry the operation.
85
DHCP request has failed
• Check the network to ensure connection
to the DHCP server.
• Ensure that the DHCP server is
operating correctly.
• Configure a static network address if
the DHCP server is inoperable or not
present.
86
Autoclean media warning; not enough
media present to support autocleaning.
Ensure that cleaning cartridges with valid
cleaning cartridge barcode labels are
available in the Autoloader or Library.
87
Drive not supported; the tape drive was
disabled because it cannot be used in this
Autoloader or Library.
Ensure that the tape drive is the correct
type and has the correct firmware.
Drive firmware revision has not changed
after a tape drive firmware upgrade.
• Verify the firmware revision of the
tape drive firmware file used for the
upgrade.
• Retry the upgrade with a different
revision of the tape drive firmware.
• If this event continues, contact Sun
customer support.
Event code
84
88
89
Power supply fan has failed. Redundancy
may be at risk.
• Verify that the indicated fan is
operational and not obstructed.
• Verify that the ambient temperature
does not exceed environmental
specifications.
• If this event continues, contact Sun
customer support.
NOTE:
The sub‐error code indicates the
affected power supply. 00 is the bottom
power supply. 01 is the second power
supply.
8A
Power supply has failed. Redundancy is
not available.
• Verify that the indicated power
supply is correctly installed and the
thumbscrews are tight.
• Power‐cycle the device.
• If this event continues, contact Sun
customer support.
NOTE:
The sub‐error code indicates the
affected power supply. 00 is the bottom
power supply. 01 is the second power
supply.
User and service guide
167
Description
Details and Solution
One of the redundant power supplies has
failed.
• Verify that both power supplies are
correctly installed and the thumbscrews
are tight.
• Power‐cycle the device.
• If this event continues, contact Sun
customer support.
8C
Invalid robotics code; does not match with
the loaded Autoloader or Library firmware.
• Ensure that the file used for the
Autoloader or Library firmware
upgrade was correct.
• Retry the firmware upgrade process.
• If this event continues, contact Sun
customer support.
DB
External cooling fan error (fan motion has
stopped). The subcode indicates which
drive sled fan is affected.
Subcode 00: drive sled #1
Subcode 01: drive sled #1
• Verify that the fan for the indicated fan
is operational and not obstructed.
• If the problem continues, contact Sun
customer support.
Power supply fan has failed, redundancy
may be at risk.
• Verify that the fan for the indicated fan
is operational and not obstructed.
• Check ambient temperature conditions.
• Upgrade the Autoloader or Library
firmware to the latest release.
• If the problem continues, contact Sun
customer support.
Power supply has failed, redundancy is not
available.
• Verify that the power supply is inserted
correctly and that the thumbscrews are
adjusted.
• Power cycle the unit.
• Upgrade the Autoloader or Library
firmware to the latest release.
• If the problem continues, contact Sun
customer support.
Event code
8B
DD
DE
168
Troubleshooting
6 Upgrading and servicing the
Autoloader or Library
CAUTION:
A discharge of static electricity can damage static‐sensitive devices or microcircuitry. Proper
packaging and grounding techniques are necessary precautions to prevent damage.
To prevent electrostatic damage, observe the following precautions:
• Transport products in static‐safe containers such as conductive tubes, bags, or boxes.
• Keep electrostatic‐sensitive parts in their containers until they arrive at static‐free stations.
• Cover the device with approved static‐dissipating material. Provide a wrist strap connected to
the work surface and properly grounded tools and equipment.
• Keep the work area free of nonconducting materials, such as ordinary plastic assembly aids
and foam packing.
• Make sure you are always properly grounded when touching a static‐sensitive component or
assembly.
• Avoid touching pins, leads, or circuitry.
• Use conductive field service tools.
WARNING!
The SL24 Tape Autoloader weighs up to 15.6 kg (34.3 lb) without media and up to 20.4 kg (44.9 lb)
with media (24 cartridges). The SL48 Tape Library weighs up to 24.6 kg (54.1 lb) without media
and up to 34.2 kg (75.2 lb) with media (48 cartridges).
WARNING!
To reduce the risk of personal injury or damage to equipment:
• Extend leveling jacks to the floor.
• Ensure that the full weight of the rack rests on the leveling jacks.
• Install stabilizing feet on the rack.
• Extend only one rack component at a time. Racks may become unstable if more than one
component is extended.
CAUTION:
Before moving the Autoloader or Library, remove all media. During a move, the cartridges could
come out of the storage slots and damage the Autoloader or Library.
Possible tools needed
To service the Autoloader or Library you may need one or more of the following tools:
• Flat‐blade screwdrivers (large and small)
• Short‐handle #1 Phillips screwdriver
• #2 and #3 Phillips screwdrivers
• Ground strap
• Paper clip or pin (for manual magazine removal)
User and service guide
169
Installing a new tape drive
The Autoloader and Library support LTO tape drives. The SL24 Tape Autoloader can support one
full‐height tape drive or up to two half‐height tape drives. The SL48 Tape Library can support up to
two full‐height drives or up to four half‐height drives.
To add an LTO tape drive:
1.
Locate the next vacant drive bay on the back of the Library or Autoloader, which should be
directly above the currently installed drives.
NOTE:
Tape drives are numbered from the bottom of the Library or Autoloader up starting with 1. If you
leave a space and later add a drive in the space, the new drive will be assigned the next available
number, leaving the drives numbered out of order. If the settings are restored to the factory
defaults or the Library or Autoloader is power‐cycled, the drives will be renumbered and you
might need to update the configuration of your backup software.
Remove the face plate covering the drive bay by removing the screws holding it in place.
2.
Holding the tape drive by the handle and supporting it from the bottom, slide it into the drive bay
until it is flush with the back of the Autoloader or Library (see Figure 94).
10807
Figure 94 Installing a new tape drive
170
Upgrading and servicing the Autoloader or Library
3.
Tighten the blue captive screws (see Figure 95) by hand to secure the tape drive to the Library
chassis.
10798
Figure 95 Tighten the blue thumbscrews
4.
Plan the configuration for the new tape drive:
5.
• Parallel SCSI: See “Planning the SCSI configuration” on page 30. If the tape drive’s
SCSI address must be changed, do so before connecting the drive to the host. See
“Changing the SCSI address” on page 42.
• SAS: See “Planning the SAS configuration” on page 31.
• Fibre Channel: See “Planning the Fibre Channel configuration” on page 33.
Connect the tape drive to the host:
6.
• Parallel SCSI: Connect one of the connectors on the parallel SCSI cable to the tape drive
and connect the other end of the cable to the HBA or other device on the same parallel
SCSI bus. If the tape drive is the last device on the parallel SCSI bus, attach the terminator
to the other parallel SCSI connector on the tape drive.
• SAS: The cable supplied with the SAS 2U Tape Autoloader and 4U Tape Library can
connect up to four SAS tape drives to an HBA. Any tape drive can be connected with any
of the four tape drive ends of the cable. Plug one of the unused mini‐SAS connectors on
the tape drive end of the cable into the connector on the tape drive.
• Fibre Channel: Plug one end of the Fibre Channel into a port on the tape drive. Plug the
other end of the cable into the HBA or switch.
If necessary, upgrade the device and drive firmware using the RMI or a USB flash drive.
Removing and replacing a tape drive
Tape drives are installed at the back of the Autoloader or Library.
NOTE:
This part is hot‐swappable. You do not need to power off the Autoloader or Library to replace a
drive.
CAUTION:
Powering off the master drive interrupts SCSI communication to the Autoloader or Library and
robotics.
To remove a tape drive:
1.
Using the remote management interface or the operator control panel, unload any tape cartridge
from the drive you would like to remove, if present.
User and service guide
171
2.
Power off the drive from the operator control panel or RMI. (For the SL24, see “Powering
a drive on or off (Support > Power On/Off Drives)” on page 107. For the SL48, see
“Powering drives on and off (Support > Power on/off Drives)” on page 127.)
3.
Make sure the LED on the tape drive is off (see Figure 96).
10783
Figure 96 Drive LEDs
4.
Remove the cables and terminator, if applicable, from the tape drive being removed.
5.
Loosen the blue captive thumbscrews on the drive (see Figure 97). Half‐height drives have two
captive thumbscrews; full‐height drives have four captive thumbscrews.
10798
Figure 97 Captive screws on the tape drive
6.
Pull straight back on the tape drive handle to remove the tape drive from the Autoloader or
Library (see Figure 98).
10797
Figure 98 Removing a tape drive
172
Upgrading and servicing the Autoloader or Library
To replace a tape drive:
1.
Before installing the new drive, inspect the connectors on the tape drive. Ensure that the
connectors are intact, free of any foreign objects, and have no cracks or deformed or bent contacts.
2.
Slowly insert the new tape drive into the drive bay, and align the connectors on the Autoloader or
Library while supporting the drive assembly until the drive seats itself against the back of the
Autoloader or Library (see Figure 99).
CAUTION:
Push in on the tape drive handle while supporting the bottom of the tape drive until it is properly
seated. Damage to the connector pins may occur if this procedure is not followed.
10807
Figure 99 Installing a tape drive
3.
Tighten the blue captive thumbscrews by hand until the drive is secure.
4.
Attach the cords and terminator, if necessary, that you removed from the old tape drive.
5.
Power on the tape drive.
6.
If necessary, upgrade the device and drive firmware using the RMI or a USB flash drive.
NOTE:
If you are upgrading a parallel SCSI drive, be sure to use supported cabling configurations. See
“Planning the SCSI configuration” on page 30.
NOTE:
The Autoloader or Library assigns the WWNames used by Fibre Channel drives to the drive
locations. When you replace a tape drive, the WWName is re‐assigned to the replacement drive.
The Autoloader or Library assigns SAS World Wide IDs to the drive locations. When you replace a
SAS tape drive, the World Wide ID is re‐assigned to the replacement drive.
User and service guide
173
Removing and replacing a magazine
CAUTION:
Only remove a magazine manually in an emergency or if you need to remove the magazines from
both sides of the device. Failure to follow normal procedure can cause data loss and equipment
damage.
If possible, the magazines should be released using the operator control panel (OCP) or the remote
management interface (RMI). Sun recommends that you release the magazines using the OCP or RMI;
however, if the OCP process fails, or if a magazine needs to be removed when the power to the device
is off, you can release the magazines manually.
TIP:
The SL48 has multiple magazines on each side. The Library will release all of the magazines on
a side at the same time. If you want to remove more than one magazine from a side, pull the
magazines that need to be removed out a few centimeters or inches immediately after the Library
releases them. You can then remove the magazines from the Library one at a time.
Using the SL24 operator control panel
Removing magazines requires the administrator password.
To remove a magazine:
1.
From the Home screen, press Previous or Next until the screen displays Operations.
2.
Press Enter to select.
3.
Press Previous or Next until the screen displays either Unlock Left Magazine or Unlock Right
Magazine.
4.
Press Enter to select the desired magazine to unlock.
5.
Enter the administrator password if requested.
6.
The display reads Left Magazine Unlocked or Right Magazine Unlocked.
7.
Pull the released magazine out of the device.
8.
The screen displays Insert Left Magazine or Insert Right Magazine. The Library or Autoloader
cannot perform any other operation until the magazine is replaced. After exchanging tapes in a
magazine, slide the magazine completely into the Autoloader. The magazine locks into place after
it is correctly installed and the Autoloader inventories the magazine.
Using the SL48 operator control panel
Removing magazines requires the administrator password.
To remove magazines:
1.
From the Operations menu, select Unlock Left Magazines or Unlock Right Magazines.
2.
Enter the administrator password if requested.
3.
Pull all the magazines you want to remove out a few centimeters or inches to move them past
the latch.
4.
Pull the magazines out one at a time.
174
Upgrading and servicing the Autoloader or Library
5.
The Library cannot perform any other operation until the magazines are replaced. After exchanging
tapes in a magazine, slide the magazine completely into the Library. Each magazine locks into
place after it is correctly installed. When all magazines are in place, the Library inventories the
replaced magazines.
Using the remote management interface
To login, select the Administrator Account Type, enter the administrator password, and press Sign In.
Figure 100 RMI login page
Go to the Operations: Magazines page. This page allows you to release the right or left magazines
from the Library.
Figure 101 Operations: Magazines page
User and service guide
175
Using the manual release
1.
From the back of the Autoloader or Library determine which magazine needs to be removed
using Figure 102. The magazines are released from the magazine release holes on the bottom tape
drive plate. For the SL48, the Library will release all magazines on a side at the same time.
1
2
10863
Figure 102 Manual magazine release holes
2.
1.
Right magazine release
2.
Left magazine release
Push a small metal pin or paper clip into the appropriate release hole to push on the release latch
(see Figure 103) while another person gently pulls the magazine out of the Autoloader or Library.
2
1
11342
Figure 103 Removing the left magazine
1.
Insert a pin into access hole
2.
Release and remove the magazine
Installing a redundant power supply (SL48 only)
The SL48 Tape Library has an optional redundant power supply system, which allows the Library
to continue operating when one power supply fails. With the redundant power supply system, the
Library can monitor the status of each power supply and power supply fan. The redundant power
supply can be installed without powering down the Library.
In this procedure you will:
176
Upgrading and servicing the Autoloader or Library
• Remove the power supply bay cover.
• Install the new power supply.
• Verify the installation.
CAUTION:
Parts can be damaged by electrostatic discharge. Keep parts in electrostatic containers until
needed. Ensure that you are properly grounded when touching static‐sensitive components.
To install a redundant power supply:
1.
From the back of the Library, use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the power supply bay cover.
The cover is designated with a label.
2.
Position the new power supply on the alignment rails and push it into the Library until it is flush
with the back panel, as shown in Figure 104.
11395
Figure 104 Installing the new power supply
3.
Tighten the blue thumbscrews to secure the power supply to the Library as shown in Figure 105
11263
Figure 105 Securing the power supply to the Library
4.
Attach an AC power cord to the new power connector and plug into a power outlet.
User and service guide
177
5.
Verify that the new power supply is operating properly. The blue and green LEDs on the power
supply module should be lit and the yellow LED should be off, as shown in Figure 106. Both
power supplies should be listed on the OCP screen.
1
2
3
11220
Figure 106 Power supply LEDs
1. Blue
AC power is connected.
2. Yellow
Fan failure. The fan is running too slow or is defective.
3. Green
The power supply is producing good power for the Library.
Replacing the power supply (SL48)
This process applies to the SL48 only. A redundant power supply can be replaced without powering
off the Library.
In this process you will:
• Power off the Library, if necessary, and unplug the power cord. (Only Libraries with a single
power supply.)
• Remove the old power supply.
• Install the new power supply.
• Verify the replacement.
CAUTION:
Parts can be damaged by electrostatic discharge. Keep parts in electrostatic containers until
needed. Ensure that you are properly grounded when touching static‐sensitive components.
To replace a power supply:
1.
178
If the Library only has one power supply, power off the Library from the front panel, if possible,
and remove the AC power cord. Otherwise, just remove the AC power cord from the power
supply to be replaced.
Upgrading and servicing the Autoloader or Library
2.
Loosen the three captive thumbscrews on the power supply. Grasp a thumbscrew stem on
each side of the power supply and while supporting the bottom, pull the power supply out of
the Library, as shown in Figure 107).
11351
Figure 107 Removing the old power supply
3.
Position the new power supply on the alignment rails and slide it into the Library until it is flush
with the back panel, as shown in Figure 108. Tighten the three blue thumbscrews to secure the
power supply.
11354
Figure 108 Installing the new power supply
4.
Attach an AC power cord to the replaced power supply and plug into a power outlet. Power on
the Tape Library, if necessary.
User and service guide
179
5.
Verify that the new power supply is operating properly.
1
2
3
11220
Figure 109 Power supply LEDs
1. Blue
AC power is connected.
2. Yellow
Fan failure. The fan is running too slow or is defective.
3. Green
The power supply is producing good power for the Library.
Replacing the library controller (SL48)
This process applies to the SL48 only. In this process you will:
• Record the Library settings.
• Power off the Library, unplug the power cord, and remove the Ethernet cable.
• Remove the old library controller.
• Install the new library controller.
• Verify the replacement.
CAUTION:
Parts can be damaged by electrostatic discharge. Keep parts in electrostatic containers until
needed. Ensure that you are properly grounded when touching static‐sensitive components.
CAUTION:
This part is not hot‐pluggable. You must power off the Library to replace the library controller.
To replace the library controller:
1.
Record the Library’s settings by writing down the values displayed in the OCP or the RMI.
2.
Power off the Library from the front panel. Remove the Ethernet cable, if applicable.
180
Upgrading and servicing the Autoloader or Library
3.
Loosen the two captive thumbscrews on the library controller and remove it from the Library, as
shown in Figure 110).
11278
Figure 110 Removing the library controller
4.
Position the new library controller on the alignment rails and slide it into the Library until it is
flush with the back panel, as shown in Figure 111. Tighten the two blue thumbscrews to secure
the card to the Library.
10917
Figure 111 Installing the new library controller
5.
Replace the Ethernet cable, if applicable. Power on the Tape Library.
User and service guide
181
6.
Confirm that the Library recognized the new library controller by checking the System Status
on the front panel, as shown in Figure 112.
Figure 112 SL48 system status
7.
Restore the previous settings by manually entering them in the OCP or RMI.
8.
If necessary, upgrade the Library and drive firmware using the RMI or a USB flash drive.
Removing and replacing the base chassis
In this process you will:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Record configuration settings.
Remove the tape cartridge from the tape drive.
Remove the cables, drives, and magazines from the Autoloader or Library.
Remove the power supply and library controller. (SL48 only).
Remove the Autoloader or Library from the rack or tabletop conversion cover.
Replace the base chassis.
Reinstall the Autoloader or Library into the rack or tabletop conversion cover.
Replace the cables, tape drives, and magazines.
Replace the power supply and library controller. (SL48 only).
Reconfigure the Autoloader or Library.
WARNING!
The SL24 Tape Autoloader weighs up to 15.6 kg (34.3 lb) without media and up to 20.4 kg (44.9 lb)
with media (24 cartridges). The SL48 Tape Library weighs up to 24.6 kg (54.1 lb) without media
and up to 34.2 kg (75.2 lb) with media (48 cartridges).
Recording configuration settings
If the OCP or RMI works, write down the system, drive, and network configuration settings. You will
need these settings to re‐configure the Autoloader or Library after replacing the chassis.
182
Upgrading and servicing the Autoloader or Library
TIP:
For the SL48, the configuration settings are saved on the library controller card and should transfer
to the new chassis when you install the library controller card in the new chassis. Recording
the configuration settings is a good idea in case the library controller card has a problem or is
damaged during the transfer to the new chassis.
Removing the tape cartridge from the tape drive
Before beginning, be sure no cartridges are in the tape drives. To move a cartridge with the SL24 OCP,
see “Moving tapes in the Autoloader (Operations > Move Tape)” on page 105. To move a cartridge
with the SL48 OCP, see “Moving Media (Operations > Move Media)” on page 118. To move a cartridge
with the RMI, see “Moving media” on page 80.
CAUTION:
If you cannot remove the tape cartridge from the tape drive, handle the tape drive gently during
the rest of the procedure to avoid damaging the tape and losing data.
Removing the cables, magazines, and tape drives
Power off the Autoloader or Library. Remove the power cord and other cables from the Autoloader
or Library.
Remove the magazines from the device using the manual process (see
“Releasing the magazines manually” on page 150).
To remove the tape drives:
1.
Loosen the blue captive thumbscrews on the drive (see Figure 113).
10798
Figure 113 Captive screws on the tape drive
User and service guide
183
2.
Pull straight back on the tape drive handle to remove the tape drive from the Autoloader or
Library (see Figure 114).
10797
Figure 114 Removing a tape drive
3.
Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for all other tape drives.
Removing the power supply and library controller (SL48 only)
On the SL48, the power supply and library controller are moved to the new chassis.
To remove the power supply:
1.
Loosen the three captive thumbscrews on the power supply.
2.
Grasp a thumbscrew stem on each side of the power supply. Support the bottom while pulling
the power supply out of the Library, as shown in Figure 115.
11355
Figure 115 Removing the power supply
To remove the library controller:
184
Upgrading and servicing the Autoloader or Library
1.
Loosen the two blue thumbscrews on the library controller and remove it from the Library, as
shown in Figure 116.
10916
Figure 116 Removing the library controller
2.
Place the library controller into a static safe bag.
Removing the base chassis
You will need a #2 Phillips screwdriver to remove and replace the base chassis assembly from the
rack or cover.
CAUTION:
Lift the Autoloader or Library from the side edges. Lifting the Autoloader or Library from the
magazine or tape drive openings can damage the Autoloader or Library.
To remove the base chassis from the rack or table top conversion cover:
1.
Obtain adequate assistance to lift and stabilize the Autoloader or Library during removal and
replacement.
User and service guide
185
2.
From the front of the Autoloader or Library (see Figure 117, 1) loosen the screws inside the
left and right front bezel (these are captive screws and cannot be removed), then 2) slide the
Autoloader or Library out of the rack or cover using assistance.
1
2
11348
Figure 117 Removing the base chassis from the rack
Unpacking the new chassis
Unpack the new chassis and place it on a sturdy table. Save the packaging materials to return the
old chassis.
Replacing the base chassis
CAUTION:
Lift the chassis from the side edges. Lifting the chassis from the magazine openings can damage
the chassis.
To replace the Autoloader or Library components and install the base chassis in the rack or in the
tabletop conversion cover:
1.
The shipping lock prevents the robotic transport mechanism from moving during shipment. You
must remove the shipping lock before powering on the device. The shipping lock is held in place
with a piece of tape and is located in the top center of the new chassis. After the shipping lock is
removed, it should be stored on the back panel of the chassis for future use.
To remove and store the shipping lock:
a.
186
Locate the tape and lock at the top of the chassis (see Figure 118).
Upgrading and servicing the Autoloader or Library
10806
Figure 118 Shipping lock location
b.
c.
Remove the tape, then remove the lock.
Store the lock on the back panel of the device (see Figure 119).
10808
Figure 119 Shipping lock storage location
2.
Mount the Autoloader or Library in a rack or in the tabletop conversion cover.
To mount the Autoloader or Library in a rack:
a. With assistance, slide the Autoloader or Library onto the metal rails that are already in
position in the rack.
b. From the front of the device, secure the front bezel to the rack using a #2 Phillips screw
driver placed through the small holes in the mounting bracket to tighten the captive screws
on each side of the device.
User and service guide
187
11343
Figure 120 Securing a Tape Library to the rack
To replace the tabletop conversion cover:
3.
a. Set the new base chassis on a sturdy surface in front of the cover.
b. Slide the chassis into the cover until the front panel of the chassis is aligned with the cover.
c. Tighten the captive screws on the chassis front panel until the cover is secure.
Replace the tape drives.
4.
Replace the magazines.
5.
Replace the cords and cables.
6.
For the SL48, replace the power supply and library controller.
7.
Reconnect the cables and power cord.
8.
Power on the Autoloader or Library.
9.
Reconfigure the Autoloader or Library.
188
Upgrading and servicing the Autoloader or Library
A Technical specifications
Physical specifications
Table 41 SL24 Tape Autoloader physical specifications: all models
Characteristics
Product alone
Packaged
Height
87.5 mm (3.44 inches)
250 mm (9.84 inches)
Width
445 mm (17.5 inches)
580 mm (22.83 inches)
Depth
775.5 mm (30.53 inches)
990 mm (38.97 inches)
Weight
15 kg (33.07 pounds)
25.5 (56.22 pounds)
Table 42 SL48 Tape Library physical specifications: all models
Characteristics
Product alone
Packaged
Height
174 mm (6.85 inches)
344 mm (13.54 inches)
Width
445 mm (17.5 inches)
596 mm (23.46 inches)
Depth
776 mm (30.55 inches)
994 mm (39.13 inches)
Weight
20.6 kg (45.32 pounds)
33.2 (73.04 pounds)
Environmental specifications
Table 43 Environmental specifications
Characteristic
Specification
Temperature
Operating
10º to 35º C
Non‐operating
‐30º to 60º C
Recommended operating temperature
10º to 35º C
Temperature shock immunity ‐ maximum rate of
change
10º C per hour
Miscellaneous
Dust concentration
less than 200 microgram/cubic meter
Altitude
3050 meters (10,000 ft.)
Humidity
Operating
20% to 80% RH non‐condensing
Non‐operating
20% to 80% RH non‐condensing
User and service guide
189
190
Technical specifications
B Regulatory compliance and safety
Regulatory compliance
Regulatory compliance identification numbers
For the purpose of regulatory compliance certifications and identification, your product has been
assigned a unique Regulatory Model Number. The RMN can be found on the product nameplate label,
along with all required approval markings and information. When requesting compliance information
for this product, always refer to this RMN. The Regulatory Model Number should not be confused
with the marketing name or model number of the product.
Regulatory compliance label location
The Regulatory Compliance label is located on the bottom of the device. To view this information,
from the back of the device, tilt the device up until the label is visible.
Regulatory model number
LVLDC‐0501
Emissions classification
Class A
Federal Communications Commission notice
Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and Regulations has established
Radio Frequency (RF) emission limits to provide an interference‐free radio frequency spectrum. Many
electronic devices, including computers, generate RF energy incidental to their intended function and
are, therefore, covered by these rules. These rules place computers and related peripheral devices into
two classes, A and B, depending upon their intended installation. Class A devices are those that may
reasonably be expected to be installed in a business or commercial environment. Class B devices are
those that may reasonably be expected to be installed in a residential environment (such as personal
computers). The FCC requires devices in both classes to bear a label indicating the interference
potential of the device as well as additional operating instructions for the user.
The rating label on the device shows which class (A or B) the equipment falls into. Class B devices
have an FCC logo or FCC ID on the label. Class A devices do not have an FCC logo or FCC ID on the
label. Once the class of the device is determined, refer to the following corresponding statement.
Class A equipment
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation
of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user is
required to correct the interference at personal expense.
Class B equipment
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can
User and service guide
191
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may
cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference
will not occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be
determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit that is different from that to which the
receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help.
Declaration of conformity for products marked with the FCC logo, United States only
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
For questions regarding your product, visit http://www.sun.com
For questions regarding this FCC declaration, contact us by mail or telephone:
• Hewlett‐Packard Company P.O. Box 692000, Mailstop 510101 Houston, Texas 77269‐2000
• 1‐281‐514‐3333
To identify this product, refer to the part, Regulatory Model Number, or product number found
on the product.
Modifications
The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that
are not expressly approved by Hewlett‐Packard Company may void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
Cables
Connections to this device must be made with shielded cables with metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods
in order to maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations.
Laser device
All HP systems equipped with a laser device comply with safety standards, including International
Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) 825. With specific regard to the laser, the equipment complies with
laser product performance standards set by government agencies as a Class 1 laser product. The
product does not emit hazardous light.
Laser safety warning
WARNING!
To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:
• Do not try to open the laser device enclosure. There are no user‐serviceable components inside.
• Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other
than those specified herein.
• Allow only authorized service technicians to repair the laser device.
192
Regulatory compliance and safety
International notices and statements
Canadian notice (avis Canadien)
Class A equipment
This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference‐Causing
Equipment Regulations.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel
brouilleur du Canada.
Class B equipment
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference‐Causing
Equipment Regulations.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel
brouilleur du Canada.
European Union notice
This product complies with the following EU directives:
• Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC
• EMC Directive 2004/108/EC
Compliance with these directives implies conformity to applicable harmonized European standards
(European Norms) which are listed on the EU Declaration of Conformity issued by Hewlett‐Packard
for this product or product family.
This compliance is indicated by the following conformity marking placed on the product:
This marking is valid for non‐Telecom products and EU harmonized Telecom products (e.g., Bluetooth).
Certificates can be obtained from http://www.hp.com/go/certificates.
Hewlett‐Packard GmbH, HQ‐TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 140, 71034 Boeblingen, Germany.
BSMI notice
User and service guide
193
Japanese notice
Korean notices
Safety
Taiwan battery recycling notice
The Taiwan EPA requires dry battery manufacturing
or importing firms in accordance with Article 15
of the Waste Disposal Act to indicate the recovery
marks on the batteries used in sales, giveaway or
promotion. Contact a qualified Taiwanese recycler
for proper battery disposal.
194
Regulatory compliance and safety
Power cords
The power cord set must meet the requirements for use in the country where the product was
purchased. If the product is to be used in another country, purchase a power cord that is approved
for use in that country.
The power cord must be rated for the product and for the voltage and current marked on the product
electrical ratings label. The voltage and current rating of the cord should be greater than the voltage
and current rating marked on the product. In addition, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum
of 1.00 mm2 or 18 AWG, and the length of the cord must be between 1.8 m (6 ft) and 3.6 m (12 ft). If
you have questions about the type of power cord to use, contact an authorized service provider.
NOTE:
Route power cords so that they will not be walked on and cannot be pinched by items placed upon
or against them. Pay particular attention to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the
cords exit from the product.
Japanese power cord notice
Waste electrical and electronic equipment directive
Czechoslovakian notice
User and service guide
195
Danish notice
Bortskaffelse af affald fra husstande i den Europæiske Union
Hvis produktet eller dets emballage er forsynet med dette symbol, angiver det,
at produktet ikke må bortskaffes med andet almindeligt husholdningsaffald.
I stedet er det dit ansvar at bortskaffe kasseret udstyr ved at aflevere det på den
kommunale genbrugsstation, der forestår genvinding af kasseret elektrisk og
elektronisk udstyr. Den centrale modtagelse og genvinding af kasseret udstyr
i forbindelse med bortskaffelsen bidrager til bevarelse af naturlige ressourcer
og sikrer, at udstyret genvindes på en måde, der beskytter både mennesker og miljø.
Yderligere oplysninger om, hvor du kan aflevere kasseret udstyr til genvinding, kan du få hos
kommunen, den lokale genbrugsstation eller i den butik, hvor du købte produktet.
Dutch notice
Verwijdering van afgedankte apparatuur door privé-gebruikers in de Europese Unie
Dit symbool op het product of de verpakking geeft aan dat dit product niet
mag worden gedeponeerd bij het normale huishoudelijke afval. U bent zelf
verantwoordelijk voor het inleveren van uw afgedankte apparatuur bij een
inzamelingspunt voor het recyclen van oude elektrische en elektronische
apparatuur. Door uw oude apparatuur apart aan te bieden en te recyclen,
kunnen natuurlijke bronnen worden behouden en kan het materiaal worden
hergebruikt op een manier waarmee de volksgezondheid en het milieu worden beschermd.
Neem contact op met uw gemeente, het afvalinzamelingsbedrijf of de winkel waar u het
product hebt gekocht voor meer informatie over inzamelingspunten waar u oude apparatuur
kunt aanbieden voor recycling.
English notice
Disposal of waste equipment by users in private household in the European Union
This symbol on the product or on its packaging indicates that this product must not be disposed of
with your other household waste. Instead, it is your responsibility to dispose of your waste equipment
by handing it over to a designated collection point for recycling of waste electrical and electronic
equipment. The separate collection and recycling of your waste equipment at the time of disposal will
help to conserve natural resources and ensure that it is recycled in a manner that protects human health
and the environment. For more information about where you can drop off your waste equipment for
recycling, please contact your local city office, your household waste disposal service, or the shop where
you purchased the product.
196
Regulatory compliance and safety
Estonian notice
Seadmete jäätmete kõrvaldamine eramajapidamistes Euroopa Liidus
See tootel või selle pakendil olev sümbol näitab, et kõnealust toodet ei tohi
koos teiste majapidamisjäätmetega kõrvaldada. Teie kohus on oma
seadmete jäätmed kõrvaldada, viies need elektri- ja elektroonikaseadmete
jäätmete ringlussevõtmiseks selleks ettenähtud kogumispunkti. Seadmete
jäätmete eraldi kogumine ja ringlussevõtmine kõrvaldamise ajal aitab kaitsta
loodusvarasid ning tagada, et ringlussevõtmine toimub viisil, mis kaitseb inimeste tervist
ning keskkonda. Lisateabe saamiseks selle kohta, kuhu oma seadmete jäätmed
ringlussevõtmiseks viia, võtke palun ühendust oma kohaliku linnakantselei,
majapidamisjäätmete kõrvaldamise teenistuse või kauplusega, kust Te toote ostsite.
Finnish notice
Laitteiden hävittäminen kotitalouksissa Euroopan unionin alueella
Jos tuotteessa tai sen pakkauksessa on tämä merkki, tuotetta ei saa hävittää
kotitalousjätteiden mukana. Tällöin hävitettävä laite on toimitettava sähkölaitteiden
ja elektronisten laitteiden kierrätyspisteeseen. Hävitettävien laitteiden erillinen
käsittely ja kierrätys auttavat säästämään luonnonvaroja ja varmistamaan, että
laite kierrätetään tavalla, joka estää terveyshaitat ja suojelee luontoa. Lisätietoja
paikoista, joihin hävitettävät laitteet voi toimittaa kierrätettäväksi, saa ottamalla
yhteyttä jätehuoltoon tai liikkeeseen, josta tuote on ostettu.
French notice
Élimination des appareils mis au rebut par les ménages dans l'Union européenne
Le symbole apposé sur ce produit ou sur son emballage indique que ce produit
ne doit pas être jeté avec les déchets ménagers ordinaires. Il est de votre
responsabilité de mettre au rebut vos appareils en les déposant dans les centres
de collecte publique désignés pour le recyclage des équipements électriques
et électroniques. La collecte et le recyclage de vos appareils mis au rebut
indépendamment du reste des déchets contribue à la préservation des ressources
naturelles et garantit que ces appareils seront recyclés dans le respect de la santé humaine
et de l'environnement. Pour obtenir plus d'informations sur les centres de collecte et de
recyclage des appareils mis au rebut, veuillez contacter les autorités locales de votre région, l
es services de collecte des ordures ménagères ou le magasin dans lequel vous avez acheté
ce produit.
User and service guide
197
German notice
Entsorgung von Altgeräten aus privaten Haushalten in der EU
Das Symbol auf dem Produkt oder seiner Verpackung weist darauf hin, dass
das Produkt nicht über den normalen Hausmüll entsorgt werden darf. Benutzer
sind verpflichtet, die Altgeräte an einer Rücknahmestelle für Elektro- und
Elektronik-Altgeräte abzugeben. Die getrennte Sammlung und ordnungsgemäße
Entsorgung Ihrer Altgeräte trägt zur Erhaltung der natürlichen Ressourcen bei
und garantiert eine Wiederverwertung, die die Gesundheit des Menschen und
die Umwelt schützt. Informationen dazu, wo Sie Rücknahmestellen für Ihre Altgeräte finden,
erhalten Sie bei Ihrer Stadtverwaltung, den örtlichen Müllentsorgungsbetrieben oder im
Geschäft, in dem Sie das Gerät erworben haben.
Greek notice
.
,
.
.
,
,
.
198
Regulatory compliance and safety
Hungarian notice
Készülékek magánháztartásban történ selejtezése az Európai Unió területén
A készüléken, illetve a készülék csomagolásán látható azonos szimbólum annak
jelzésére szolgál, hogy a készülék a selejtezés során az egyéb háztartási
hulladéktól eltér módon kezelend . A vásárló a hulladékká vált készüléket köteles
a kijelölt gy jt helyre szállítani az elektromos és elektronikai készülékek
újrahasznosítása céljából. A hulladékká vált készülékek selejtezéskori begy jtése
és újrahasznosítása hozzájárul a természeti er források meg rzéséhez, valamint biztosítja
a selejtezett termékek környezetre és emberi egészségre nézve biztonságos feldolgozását.
A begy jtés pontos helyér l b vebb tájékoztatást a lakhelye szerint illetékes önkormányzattól,
az illetékes szemételtakarító vállalattól, illetve a terméket elárusító helyen kaphat.
Italian notice
Smaltimento delle apparecchiature da parte di privati nel territorio dell'Unione Europea
Questo simbolo presente sul prodotto o sulla sua confezione indica che il prodotto
non può essere smaltito insieme ai rifiuti domestici. È responsabilità dell'utente
smaltire le apparecchiature consegnandole presso un punto di raccolta designato
al riciclo e allo smaltimento di apparecchiature elettriche ed elettroniche. La raccolta
differenziata e il corretto riciclo delle apparecchiature da smaltire permette di
proteggere la salute degli individui e l'ecosistema. Per ulteriori informazioni relative
ai punti di raccolta delle apparecchiature, contattare l'ente locale per lo smaltimento dei rifiuti,
oppure il negozio presso il quale è stato acquistato il prodotto.
Latvian notice
Nolietotu iek rtu izn cin šanas noteikumi lietot jiem Eiropas Savien bas
priv taj s m jsaimniec b s
Š ds simbols uz izstr d juma vai uz t iesai ojuma nor da, ka šo
izstr d jumu nedr kst izmest kop ar citiem sadz ves atkritumiem. J s
atbildat par to, lai nolietot s iek rtas tiktu nodotas speci li iek rtotos
punktos, kas paredz ti izmantoto elektrisko un elektronisko iek rtu
sav kšanai otrreiz jai p rstr dei. Atseviš a nolietoto iek rtu sav kšana un
otrreiz j p rstr de pal dz s saglab t dabas resursus un garant s, ka š s iek rtas tiks
otrreiz ji p rstr d tas t d veid , lai pasarg tu vidi un cilv ku vesel bu. Lai uzzin tu, kur
nolietot s iek rtas var izmest otrreiz jai p rstr dei, j v ršas savas dz ves vietas
pašvald b , sadz ves atkritumu sav kšanas dienest vai veikal , kur izstr d jums tika
nopirkts.
User and service guide
199
Lihuanian notice
Nolietotu iek rtu izn cin šanas noteikumi lietot jiem Eiropas Savien bas
priv taj s m jsaimniec b s
Š ds simbols uz izstr d juma vai uz t iesai ojuma nor da, ka šo
izstr d jumu nedr kst izmest kop ar citiem sadz ves atkritumiem. J s
atbildat par to, lai nolietot s iek rtas tiktu nodotas speci li iek rtotos
punktos, kas paredz ti izmantoto elektrisko un elektronisko iek rtu
sav kšanai otrreiz jai p rstr dei. Atseviš a nolietoto iek rtu sav kšana un
otrreiz j p rstr de pal dz s saglab t dabas resursus un garant s, ka š s iek rtas tiks
otrreiz ji p rstr d tas t d veid , lai pasarg tu vidi un cilv ku vesel bu. Lai uzzin tu, kur
nolietot s iek rtas var izmest otrreiz jai p rstr dei, j v ršas savas dz ves vietas
pašvald b , sadz ves atkritumu sav kšanas dienest vai veikal , kur izstr d jums tika
nopirkts.
Polish notice
Pozbywanie si zu ytego sprz tu przez u ytkowników w prywatnych gospodarstwach
domowych w Unii Europejskiej
Ten symbol na produkcie lub jego opakowaniu oznacza, e produktu nie wolno
wyrzuca do zwykłych pojemników na mieci. Obowi zkiem u ytkownika jest
przekazanie zu ytego sprz tu do wyznaczonego punktu zbiórki w celu recyklingu
odpadów powstałych ze sprz tu elektrycznego i elektronicznego. Osobna zbiórka
oraz recykling zu ytego sprz tu pomog w ochronie zasobów naturalnych
i zapewni ponowne wprowadzenie go do obiegu w sposób chroni cy zdrowie człowieka
i rodowisko. Aby uzyska wi cej informacji o tym, gdzie mo na przekaza zu yty sprz t do
recyklingu, nale y si skontaktowa z urz dem miasta, zakładem gospodarki odpadami lub
sklepem, w którym zakupiono produkt.
200
Regulatory compliance and safety
Portuguese notice
Descarte de Lixo Elétrico na Comunidade Européia
Este símbolo encontrado no produto ou na embalagem indica que o produto não
deve ser descartado no lixo doméstico comum. É responsabilidade do cliente
descartar o material usado (lixo elétrico), encaminhando-o para um ponto de
coleta para reciclagem. A coleta e a reciclagem seletivas desse tipo de lixo
ajudarão a conservar as reservas naturais; sendo assim, a reciclagem será feita
de uma forma segura, protegendo o ambiente e a saúde das pessoas. Para obter
mais informações sobre locais que reciclam esse tipo de material, entre em contato com
o escritório da HP em sua cidade, com o serviço de coleta de lixo ou com a loja em que
o produto foi adquirido.
Slovakian notice
Slovenian notice
User and service guide
201
Spanish notice
Eliminación de residuos de equipos eléctricos y electrónicos por parte de usuarios
particulares en la Unión Europea
Este símbolo en el producto o en su envase indica que no debe eliminarse junto
con los desperdicios generales de la casa. Es responsabilidad del usuario eliminar
los residuos de este tipo depositándolos en un "punto limpio" para el reciclado
de residuos eléctricos y electrónicos. La recogida y el reciclado selectivos de
los residuos de aparatos eléctricos en el momento de su eliminación contribuirá
a conservar los recursos naturales y a garantizar el reciclado de estos residuos
de forma que se proteja el medio ambiente y la salud. Para obtener más información sobre
los puntos de recogida de residuos eléctricos y electrónicos para reciclado, póngase en
contacto con su ayuntamiento, con el servicio de eliminación de residuos domésticos o
con el establecimiento en el que adquirió el producto.
Swedish notice
Bortskaffande av avfallsprodukter från användare i privathushåll inom
Europeiska Unionen
Om den här symbolen visas på produkten eller förpackningen betyder det att
produkten inte får slängas på samma ställe som hushållssopor. I stället är det
ditt ansvar att bortskaffa avfallet genom att överlämna det till ett uppsamlingsställe
avsett för återvinning av avfall från elektriska och elektroniska produkter. Separat
insamling och återvinning av avfallet hjälper till att spara på våra naturresurser
och gör att avfallet återvinns på ett sätt som skyddar människors hälsa och miljön.
Kontakta ditt lokala kommunkontor, din närmsta återvinningsstation för hushållsavfall eller
affären där du köpte produkten för att få mer information om var du kan lämna ditt avfall
för återvinning.
202
Regulatory compliance and safety
C Electrostatic discharge
To prevent damaging the system, be aware of the precautions you need to follow when setting up
the system or handling parts. A discharge of static electricity from a finger or other conductor
may damage system boards or other static‐sensitive devices. This type of damage may reduce the
life expectancy of the device.
Topics include:
• Preventing electrostatic damage
• Grounding methods
Preventing electrostatic damage
To prevent electrostatic damage, observe the following precautions:
•
•
•
•
•
Avoid hand contact by transporting and storing products in static‐safe containers.
Keep electrostatic‐sensitive parts in their containers until they arrive at static‐free workstations.
Place parts on a grounded surface before removing them from their containers.
Avoid touching pins, leads, or circuitry.
Always be properly grounded when touching a static‐sensitive component or assembly. See
the next section.
Grounding methods
There are several methods for grounding. Use one or more of the following methods when handling
or installing electrostatic‐sensitive parts:
• Use a wrist strap connected by a ground cord to a grounded workstation or computer chassis.
Wrist straps are flexible straps with a minimum of 1 megohm (±10 percent) resistance in the
ground cords. To provide proper ground, wear the strap snug against the skin.
• Use heel straps, toe straps, or boot straps at standing workstations. Wear the straps on both
feet when standing on conductive floors or dissipating floor mats.
• Use conductive field service tools.
• Use a portable field service kit with a folding static‐dissipating work mat.
If you do not have any of the suggested equipment for proper grounding, have an Sun authorized
reseller install the part.
NOTE:
For more information on static electricity, or assistance with product installation, contact your Sun
authorized reseller.
User and service guide
203
204
Electrostatic discharge
Glossary
barcode reader
A component of the robot that is used for cartridge identification and position
calibration.
cartridge
The plastic housing around a cartridge tape. A plastic leader block is attached
to the tape for automatic threading when loaded in transport. The spine of
the cartridge contains a label listing the volume identification number.
cell
The slot in the magazine that is used to store a tape cartridge.
channel 0
The first physical link in a standard SAS external connector. A standard SAS
external connector supports four physical links, which are numbered 0, 1, 2,
and 3. The tape drive only uses the first link on the external connector.
Class A digital device
Class A equipment is intended for commercial installation.
Class I laser product
Class 1 lasers are products where the power of the laser beam produced (the
accessible emission) is always below the Maximum Permissible Exposure
value. Therefore, for Class 1 lasers the output power is below the level at
which it is believed eye damage will occur. Exposure to the beam of a Class 1
laser will not result in eye injury. Class 1 lasers may therefore be considered
eye safe.
cleaning cartridge
A tape cartridge that contains special material to clean the tape path in a
transport or drive. Ultrium cleaning cartridge labels have a CLN prefix.
CLI
Command Line Interface
daisy chaining
Parallel SCSI peripherals can be daisy chained together. Each device has a
second port used to connect the next device in line. The last device in the
chain must be terminated.
data cartridge
A term used to distinguish a cartridge onto which a tape drive may write data
from a cartridge used for cleaning purposes.
drive
The device that the Library uses to record data onto tapes.
drive bay
The space where the drive module resides.
drive cleaning
A device feature that uses a cleaning cartridge to clean a tape drive.
drive module
The entire assembly that houses the drive, including the metal housing and
connectors.
encryption
User and service guide
205
The process of changing data into a form that cannot be read until it is
deciphered, protecting the data from unauthorized access and use.
ESD
Electrostatic discharge. The release of static electricity from one conductor to
another.
Ethernet
A local‐area, packet‐switched network technology. Originally designed for
coaxial cable, it now also runs over shielded, twisted‐pair cable. Ethernet is a
10 or 100 Megabytes‐per‐second LAN.
event
A significant device occurrence (such as drive errors, online/offline transition,
drive cleaning, and other information) that is listed in an automated log.
export
The action in which the device places a cartridge into the mailslot so that the
operator can remove the cartridge. Also called eject.
FC
Fibre Channel.
Fibre Channel
A network technology primarily used for storage networks.
G
Gigabyte. A unit of storage, abbreviated as G or GB, equal to 1,024 Megabytes.
get
An activity in which a robot obtains a cartridge from a slot or drive.
GUI
Graphical user interface. Software that allows the user to control the device
through visual screens.
HBA
An acronym for host bus adapter, an interface card which plugs into the
computer’s bus and connects it to the network.
host
One or more computers that generate and communicate data to the device.
hot‐plug, hot swap
The plugging in or removal of a drive into a system with the power turned on.
HVDS
High voltage differential signaling, also called differential SCSI. HVDS
supports cable lengths up to 25 meters.
import
The process of placing a cartridge into the cartridge access port so that the
robot can insert it into a storage slot.
inventory
The process of reading and storing in memory the bar code identification and
locations of all cartridges in the Library.
LAN
Local Area Network. A computer network covering a local area, such as a
home, office, or small building, that is usually based on Ethernet technology.
LCD
206
Glossary
Liquid crystal display. A type of display that uses two sheets of polarizing
material with a liquid crystal solution.
LED
Light emitting diode. An electronic device that lights up when electricity
is passed through it.
LTO
An acronym for Linear Tape‐Open technology. An “open format” technology,
which means that users will have multiple sources of products and media.
LUN
Logical Unit Number. An address for a component of a SCSI device, similar
to an apartment number. In this device, the host computer sends the SCSI
commands for the Library to LUN 1 of the Master tape drive and sends SCSI
commands for the tape drive itself to LUN 0.
LVDS
Low Voltage Differential Signaling. A low noise, low power, low amplitude
method for high‐speed (gigabits per second) data transmission over copper
wire.
MAC address
Media Access Control address. A unique identifier attached to most forms of
networking equipment, which is part of the Ethernet specification.
magazine
A removable array that holds cartridges and is placed into the load port of
the Tape Library.
mailslot
All or part of a magazine used to import cartridges into the Library.
Megabyte
A unit of storage abbreviated as M or MB, equal to 1,024 x 1,024 = 1,048,576
bytes.
MIB
Management Information Base. A type of database used to manage the
devices in a communications network.
parallel SCSI
A suite of closely related standards in which parallel SCSI devices are
connected in parallel to form busses. Each parallel SCSI standard has its own
bus width, clock speed, maximum throughput, maximum cable length, and
maximum number of devices on the bus.
parallel SCSI devices
External parallel SCSI devices with two ports, one for the incoming cable and
another for the outgoing cable to the next device. (see daisy chaining).
put
An activity in which a robot places a cartridge into a slot or drive.
RAID
Redundant Array of Inexpensive Disks. A group of disks that work together
to improve performance. RAID 5 provides some parity protection in case
one of the disks fails.
RMI
Remote Management Interface. A web‐based interface used to monitor and
control the Library. The RMI is a website that is hosted on the Library.
User and service guide
207
robot
An electro‐mechanical device that transports tape cartridges to and from the
magazines and drives.
robotics unit
The unit that includes the robotic components and that controls the movement
of the robot between storage slots, drives, and load ports.
SAS
Serial Attached SCSI. A computer bus technology and serial communication
protocol for direct attached storage devices, including disk drives and
high‐performance tape drives.
SCSI
Pronounced scuzzy, an acronym for Small Computer System Interface, a
standard interface and command set for transferring data between mass
storage and other devices. The host computer uses SCSI commands to operate
the Tape Library. Depending on the model, the physical connection between
the host computer and the tape drives will use a parallel SCSI, SAS, or Fibre
Channel interface.
SCSI address
See SCSI ID.
SCSI devices
Computer devices with a SCSI interface. In this document, SCSI devices refers
to devices with a parallel SCSI interface.
SCSI ID
Each device on a parallel SCSI bus is identified by its SCSI ID, which is a
number in the range 0–7 on a narrow bus and 0–15 on a wide bus.
SE
Single Ended SCSI. The original SCSI bus technology, which uses single
ended signaling — where the signal is referenced to ground. SE SCSI busses
have lower signal rates and much shorter allowed cable lengths. SE SCSI
should not be used with LTO tape drives.
slot
The location in the magazine in which a tape cartridge is stored. Also called a
cell.
tape cartridge
A container holding magnetic tape that can be processed without separating
the tape from the container. The device uses data and cleaning cartridges.
These cartridges are not interchangeable.
tape drive
An electro‐mechanical device that moves magnetic tape and includes
mechanisms for writing and reading data to and from the tape.
Terabyte
A unit of storage, abbreviated as T or TB, equal to 1,024 Gigabytes.
terminator
The last device at the end of a parallel SCSI chain must be terminated by
terminator into the connector. An appropriate terminator is shipped with
parallel SCSI devices.
U
A measure of chassis height. 1U in rack measurement is 44.45 millimeters
(1.75 inches).
208
Glossary
USB
Universal Serial Bus. A serial bus standard used to interface devices.
World Wide Identifier
A unique identifier in a Fiber Channel or SAS storage network, also called a
World Wide Name (WWN). The first three bytes are derived from an IEEE
Organizationally Unique Identifier (OUI), which identifies the manufacturer
or vendor. The remaining five bytes are assigned by the vendor.
WORM
An acronym for Write Once Read Many times, a class of optical recording
systems that allow recording and adding data, but not altering recorded data.
User and service guide
209
210
Glossary
Index
A
administrator password
changing
remote management interface, 76
SL24, 96
SL48, 123
restoring to null
remote management interface, 78
setting
SL24, 96
SL48, 123
alerts
configuring
remote management interface, 78
audience, 15
automatic cleaning
configuring
remote management interface, 68
SL24, 102
SL48, 122
Avis Canadien, regulatory compliance notice,
193
B
backup application
parallel SCSI troubleshooting, 133
SAS troubleshooting, 134
batteries
Taiwan EPA recycling and disposal, 194
boot straps, using, 203
BSMI, regulatory compliance notice, 193
C
cables
FCC compliance statement, 192
parallel SCSI, 132
SAS, 134
shielded, 192
Canada, regulatory compliance notice, 193
Class A equipment, Canadian compliance
statement, 193
Class B equipment, Canadian compliance
statement, 193
compatibility
parallel SCSI troubleshooting, 133
SAS troubleshooting, 134
configuration settings
restoring from file
remote management interface, 78
saving to a file
remote management interface, 78
configure
administrator password
remote management interface, 76
SL24, 96
SL48, 123
alerts
remote management interface, 78
automatic cleaning
remote management interface, 68
SL24, 102
SL48, 122
bar code reporting format
remote management interface, 68
SL24, 97
SL48, 123
date and time
remote management interface, 77
SL24, 100
SL48, 125
error log mode
remote management interface, 77
event notification parameters
remote management interface, 78
Fibre Channel drive ports
remote management interface, 72
SL24, 98
SL48, 123
Library
remote management interface, 68
SL24, 99
SL48, 121
logical libraries, 68
SL24, 96
SL48, 121
mailslot
remote management interface, 68
SL24, 97
SL48, 121
master drive
remote management interface, 68
SL24, 99
SL48, 121
network
remote management interface, 73
SL24, 101
SL48, 123
network management
remote management interface, 75
reserved slots
remote management interface, 68
SL24, 97
SL48, 121
restoring
SL48, 125
restoring administrator password
remote management interface, 78
restoring factory defaults
User and service guide
211
remote management interface, 78
SL24, 102
SL48, 124
saving
SL48, 125
SCSI ID
SL24, 98
remote management interface, 72
SL48, 123
conventions
document, 15
text symbols, 15, 37
cord. See power cord, 195
current rating, 195
D
date and time
setting
remote management interface, 77
SL24, 100
SL48, 125
declaration of conformity, 192
default password, 56
device driver
parallel SCSI troubleshooting, 133
SAS troubleshooting, 134
directive, waste electrical and electronic
equipment, 195
disposal
waste equipment for EU private
households, 196
disposal, Taiwan EPA battery, 194
dissipating floor mats, 203
document
conventions, 15
drive status
SL24, 88
SL48, 119
E
electrostatic damage prevention, 203
error log mode
configuring
remote management interface, 77
ESD (electrostatic discharge)
obtaining additional information, 203
prevention measures, 203
storing products, 203
transporting products, 203
European Union, regulatory compliance
notice, 193
event notification parameters
configuring
remote management interface, 78
212
F
factory defaults
restoring
remote management interface, 78
SL24, 102
SL48, 124
FCC (Federal Communications Commission)
Class A Equipment, compliance notice, 191
Class B Equipment, compliance notice, 191
declaration of conformity, 192
modifications, 192
notice, 191
Federal Communications Commission. See
FCC, 191
firmware
finding version
remote management interface, 83
updating
remote management interface, 83
SL24, 109
SL48, 128
floor mats, dissipating, 203
G
ground strap specifications, 203
grounding
methods, 203
straps, wearing, 203
suggested equipment for, 203
H
heel straps, using, 203
help
obtaining, 16
host adapter
parallel SCSI troubleshooting, 132
SAS troubleshooting, 134
HP
address for
FCC questions, 192
series number, 191
telephone number
FCC questions, 192
HPB
requirements, 19
I
IEC EMC, worldwide regulatory compliance
notice, 193
installing
choosing a location, 33
configuring, 45
connecting the device, 43
identifying product components, 35
installing the cover, 40
labeling and loading the tape cartridges, 46
planning the parallel SCSI configuration, 30
preparing the host, 29
rack mounting, 36
removing the shipping lock, 36, 186
unpacking, 34
verifying the connection, 46
J
Japan
regulatory compliance notice, 194
K
Korean, regulatory compliance notice, 194
L
laser
radiation, warning, 192
regulatory compliance notice, 192
Library modes
remote management interface, 68
SL24, 99
SL48, 122
log files
viewing
remote management interface, 84
SL24, 110
SL48, 128
logical libraries
configure, 68
enabling
SL24, 96
M
magazines, 52
slot numbers, 52
unlocking and replacing
remote management interface, 81
SL24, 104
SL48, 126
mailslot
opening
SL48, 116
SL24, 92
N
O
operations
cleaning tape drives
remote management interface, 85
SL24, 104
SL48, 127
enabling password locks
SL24, 107
SL48, 127
moving tapes
remote management interface, 80
SL24, 105
SL48, 118
rebooting
remote management interface, 83
SL24, 106
SL48, 129
replacing magazines
remote management interface, 81
SL24, 104
SL48, 126
unlocking magazines
remote management interface, 81
SL24, 104
SL48, 126
updating inventory
remote management interface, 81
SL24, 106
SL48, 127
operator control panel
administrator password
SL24, 91
SL48, 115
functions
SL24, 87
SL48, 112
Library status
SL48, 114
menu, 114
SL24, 90
SL48, 114
navigation buttons
SL48, 113
P
parallel SCSI cabling, 132
parallel SCSI host adapter
requirements, 19
troubleshooting, 132
parallel SCSI multiple LUN support, 19
parallel SCSI requirements, 19
parallel SCSI troubleshooting
backup application, 133
compatibility, 133
device driver, 133
termination, 133
Novell
troubleshooting performance, 146
User and service guide
213
parts
proper handling, 203
storing, 203
transporting, 203
password
default, 56
password locks
enabling
SL24, 107
SL48, 127
power cord
compliance notice, 195
current rating, 195
replacement, 195
set, 195
voltage rating, 195
preventing electrostatic damage, 203
R
rack stability
warning, 16
rebooting
remote management interface, 83
SL24, 106
SL48, 129
recycling, Taiwan EPA battery, 194
regulatory compliance
information number, 191
notices
BSMI, 193
Canada, 193
Class A, 191
Class B, 191
European Union, 193
HP series number, 191
IEC EMC statement, worldwide, 193
Japan, 194
Korean, 194
lasers, 192
modifications, 192
shielded cables, 192
remote management interface, 55
repairing
removing stuck tapes, 137
replacing a power cord, 195
restore defaults
SL24, 102
SL48, 124
RFI/EMI connector hoods, 192
S
Safety notices, 194
SAS cabling, 134
SAS host adapter
troubleshooting, 134
214
SAS troubleshooting
backup application, 134
compatibility, 134
device driver, 134
series number, regulatory compliance, 191
shipping lock, 36, 186
SNMP
configuring, 75
Specifications
environmental, 189
physical, 189
static‐dissipating work mat, 203
static‐safe containers
storing products, 203
transporting products, 203
straps, ground
boot, 203
heel, 203
toe, 203
Sun
technical support, 16
Sun Service
link
remote management interface, 85
support
cleaning tape drives
remote management interface, 85
SL24, 104
SL48, 127
firmware upgrade tape
SL24, 110
force ejecting drive
SL24, 111
SL48, 129
powering drives on and off
remote management interface, 72
SL24, 107
SL48, 127
rebooting
remote management interface, 83
SL24, 106
SL48, 129
running tests
remote management interface, 82
SL24, 107
SL48, 128
Sun Service link
remote management interface, 85
updating firmware
remote management interface, 83
SL24, 109
SL48, 128
viewing log files
remote management interface, 84
SL24, 110
SL48, 128
symbols in text, 15
T
Taiwan EPA battery recycling and disposal,
194
tape cartridges
backward read compatibility, 51
labeling, 50
types, 49
using and maintaining, 49
write‐protecting, 51
tape drives
cleaning
remote management interface, 85
SL24, 104
SL48, 127
force ejecting tape
SL24, 111
SL48, 129
powering on and off
remote management interface, 72
SL24, 107
SL48, 127
technical support
service locator website, 16
Sun, 16
telephone numbers
FCC questions, 192
termination
parallel SCSI, 133
text symbols, 15, 37
toe straps, using, 203
tools, conductive type, 203
troubleshooting
parallel SCSI device not detected,
Attention LED,
cleaning,
failure/attention indications displayed on
the front panel,
inventory problems,
media,
performance
backup server, 147
backup type, 147
disk connection, 143
file size, 142
file system, 142
Library connection, 148
media, 150
operating system, 145
power,
removing stuck tapes, 137
RMI network connection,
tape movement,
V
viewing information
drive identity
remote management interface, 60
SL24, 94
SL48, 120
drive status
remote management interface, 64
inventory
remote management interface, 67
SL24, 93
SL48, 121
Library identity
SL24, 94
remote management interface, 58
SL48, 120
Library status
remote management interface, 63
network
remote management interface, 62, 73
SL24, 95
SL48, 121
network management
remote management interface, 75
status
SL24, 95
remote management interface, 57
SL48, 119
voltage compliance rating, 195
W
warning
rack stability, 16
warnings
lasers, radiation, 192
waste electrical and electronic equipment
directive, 195
waste equipment disposal for EU private
households, 196
websites
Sun, 16
work mat, static‐dissipating, 203
wrist straps
specifications, 203
using, 203
User and service guide
215
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising